hardware descriptionxa.yimg.com/.../name/bsc6900+gsm+hardware+description(v900r0… · hardware...
TRANSCRIPT
BSC6900 GSMV900R012C01
Hardware Description
Issue 03
Date 2010-09-20
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
OverviewThis document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users witha detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.
Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BSC6900 V900R012C01
Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:
l Installersl Site operators
Organization1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the HuaweiN68E-22 cabinet.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
4 Components of the Cabinet
Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution boxor high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
5 Subracks
This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form anindependent unit.
6 Boards
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
7 Cables
This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
8 LEDs on the Boards
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
9 DIP Switches on Components
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
ConventionsSymbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided,will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
About This DocumentBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description About This Document
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.
About This DocumentBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.......................................................1-1
2 Physical Structure.......................................................................................................................2-1
3 Cabinet.........................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Appearance of the Cabinet..............................................................................................................................3-23.2 Classification of Cabinets................................................................................................................................3-33.3 Components of the Cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-43.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................3-83.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet...................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components.................................................................3-93.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet........................................................3-133.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-193.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR...........................................................................................3-303.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR .........................................................................................3-33
4 Components of the Cabinet.....................................................................................................4-14.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box..............................................................................................................4-3
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................................................4-34.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box........................................................................4-44.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...................................................4-54.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box.......................................4-6
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box...................................................................................................................4-74.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box............................................................................4-84.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box.............................................................................4-94.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box.....................................................4-104.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................4-11
4.3 Air Defence Subrack.....................................................................................................................................4-134.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................4-144.5 Cabling Frame...............................................................................................................................................4-144.6 KVM..............................................................................................................................................................4-154.7 LAN Switch...................................................................................................................................................4-164.8 GBAM...........................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM.............................................................................................................................4-19
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...........................................................................4-194.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)......................................................................4-224.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)..............................................................................4-25
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack..............................................................................................................................4-284.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack.......................................................................................4-284.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack..................................................................4-29
5 Subracks.......................................................................................................................................5-15.1 Classification of Subracks...............................................................................................................................5-25.2 Components of the Subrack............................................................................................................................5-25.3 Fan Box...........................................................................................................................................................5-4
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).........................................................................................5-45.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).........................................................................................5-7
5.4 Slots in the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................5-95.5 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................5-105.6 Configuration of the Subrack........................................................................................................................5-11
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPS....................................................................................................................5-125.6.2 Configuration of the EPS.....................................................................................................................5-135.6.3 Configuration of the TCS.....................................................................................................................5-15
5.7 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................5-16
6 Boards...........................................................................................................................................6-16.1 DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-6
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board................................................................................................................6-66.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-66.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board......................................................................................................................6-76.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board.........................................................................................6-8
6.2 DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................................6-86.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board................................................................................................................6-96.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................................................6-96.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................6-106.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board.......................................................................................6-11
6.3 DPUd Board..................................................................................................................................................6-116.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board..............................................................................................................6-126.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board.....................................................................................................................6-126.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board....................................................................................................................6-136.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board.......................................................................................6-14
6.4 DPUf Board...................................................................................................................................................6-156.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board...............................................................................................................6-156.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board......................................................................................................................6-156.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board.....................................................................................................................6-166.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board.......................................................................................6-17
6.5 EIUa Board....................................................................................................................................................6-186.5.1 Functions of the EIUa Board................................................................................................................6-18
ContentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-186.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-196.5.4 Ports on the EIUa Board.......................................................................................................................6-206.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................6-206.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board........................................................................................6-23
6.6 FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................................6-246.6.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...............................................................................................................6-246.6.2 Panel of the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-246.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board.....................................................................................................................6-256.6.4 Ports on the FG2a Board......................................................................................................................6-266.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board........................................................................................6-27
6.7 FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................................6-276.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...............................................................................................................6-286.7.2 Panel of the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-286.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board.....................................................................................................................6-296.7.4 Ports on the FG2c Board......................................................................................................................6-306.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board........................................................................................6-30
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board.......................................................................................................................................6-316.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................6-326.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-326.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board........................................................................................................6-336.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board.........................................................................................................6-346.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................6-35
6.9 GOUa Board..................................................................................................................................................6-356.9.1 Functions of the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................6-366.9.2 Panel of the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-366.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board...................................................................................................................6-376.9.4 Ports on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................6-376.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board......................................................................................6-37
6.10 GOUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-396.10.1 Functions of the GOUc Board............................................................................................................6-396.10.2 Panel of the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-406.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.................................................................................................................6-416.10.4 Ports on the GOUc Board...................................................................................................................6-426.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board....................................................................................6-42
6.11 MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................................6-446.11.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................6-446.11.2 Panel of the MDMC Board................................................................................................................6-456.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...............................................................................................................6-456.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................6-46
6.12 OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-476.12.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.............................................................................................................6-47
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-476.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board...................................................................................................................6-486.12.4 Ports on the OIUa Board....................................................................................................................6-496.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board......................................................................................6-49
6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board...................................................................................................................................6-516.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board...............................................................................................6-526.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-526.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board....................................................................................................6-546.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.....................................................................................................6-556.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board.......................................................................6-55
6.14 PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................................6-566.14.1 Functions of the PAMU Board...........................................................................................................6-576.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.................................................................................................................6-576.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board................................................................................................................6-586.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................6-596.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board...................................................................................6-60
6.15 PEUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-606.15.1 Functions of the PEUa Board.............................................................................................................6-616.15.2 Panel of the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-616.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................6-626.15.4 Ports on the PEUa Board....................................................................................................................6-626.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................6-636.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.....................................................................................6-65
6.16 PFCU Board................................................................................................................................................6-666.16.1 Functions of the PFCU Board............................................................................................................6-666.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.........................................................................................................6-676.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-68
6.17 PFCB Board................................................................................................................................................6-696.17.1 Functions of the PFCB Board............................................................................................................6-696.17.2 Pins on the PFCB Board.....................................................................................................................6-696.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board....................................................................................6-71
6.18 POUc Board................................................................................................................................................6-716.18.1 Functions of the POUc Board............................................................................................................6-726.18.2 Panel of the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-726.18.3 LEDs on the POUc Board..................................................................................................................6-736.18.4 Ports on the POUc Board...................................................................................................................6-746.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board.....................................................................................6-74
6.19 SCUa Board.................................................................................................................................................6-766.19.1 Functions of the SCUa Board.............................................................................................................6-776.19.2 Panel of the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-776.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board..................................................................................................................6-786.19.4 Ports on the SCUa Board...................................................................................................................6-79
ContentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board.....................................................................................6-806.20 TNUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-80
6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa Board............................................................................................................6-816.20.2 Panel of the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-816.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board..................................................................................................................6-826.20.4 Ports on the TNUa Board...................................................................................................................6-836.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board.....................................................................................6-83
6.21 XPUa Board................................................................................................................................................6-846.21.1 Functions of the XPUa Board............................................................................................................6-846.21.2 Panel of the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-856.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board..................................................................................................................6-866.21.4 Ports on the XPUa Board...................................................................................................................6-876.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board.....................................................................................6-87
6.22 XPUb Board................................................................................................................................................6-886.22.1 Functions of the XPUb Board............................................................................................................6-896.22.2 Panel of the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-896.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board..................................................................................................................6-906.22.4 Ports on the XPUb Board...................................................................................................................6-916.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board.....................................................................................6-91
6.23 WOPB Board...............................................................................................................................................6-926.23.1 Functions of the WOPB Board...........................................................................................................6-92
7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................7-17.1 Power Cables...................................................................................................................................................7-37.2 PGND Cables..................................................................................................................................................7-67.3 Optical Cable...................................................................................................................................................7-87.4 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.....................................................................................................................................7-97.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable.........................................................................................................7-117.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable.........................................................................................................................7-157.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable...............................................................................................7-177.8 Inter-TNUa Cable..........................................................................................................................................7-207.9 BITS Clock Cable.........................................................................................................................................7-227.10 Y-Shaped Clock Cable................................................................................................................................7-247.11 Line Clock Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-267.12 Straight-Through Cable...............................................................................................................................7-267.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................7-297.14 Alarm Box Signal Cable.............................................................................................................................7-307.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box..........................................................................7-317.16 GPS Signal Transmission Cable.................................................................................................................7-337.17 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................................7-347.18 EMU RS485 Communication Cable...........................................................................................................7-35
8 LEDs on the Boards....................................................................................................................8-18.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board...............................................................................................................................8-3
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Contents
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board...............................................................................................................................8-38.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board...............................................................................................................................8-48.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board................................................................................................................................8-48.5 LEDs on the EIUa Board................................................................................................................................8-58.6 LEDs on the FG2a Board................................................................................................................................8-68.7 LEDs on the FG2c Board................................................................................................................................8-68.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board...................................................................................................................8-78.9 LEDs on the GOUa Board..............................................................................................................................8-88.10 LEDs on the GOUc Board............................................................................................................................8-88.11 LEDs on the MDMC Board..........................................................................................................................8-98.12 LEDs on the OIUa Board............................................................................................................................8-108.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board.............................................................................................................8-108.14 LEDs on the PAMU Board.........................................................................................................................8-118.15 LEDs on the PEUa Board............................................................................................................................8-128.16 LEDs on the POUc Board...........................................................................................................................8-128.17 LEDs on the SCUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-138.18 LEDs on the TNUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-148.19 LEDs on the XPUa Board...........................................................................................................................8-158.20 LEDs on the XPUb Board...........................................................................................................................8-15
9 DIP Switches on Components.................................................................................................9-19.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.............................................................................................................................9-29.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board....................................................................................................................9-39.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................9-69.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................9-69.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board...................................................................................................................9-79.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board....................................................................................................................9-109.7 Pins on the PFCB Board................................................................................................................................9-12
ContentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figures
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure...............................................................................................................2-1Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet.............................................................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet...........................................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR............................................3-5Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)....................................................................3-7Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box).............................................................................................................................................................................3-10Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box).............................................................................................................................................................................3-12Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the high-power powerdistribution box) .................................................................................................................................................3-14Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T).......3-16Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HPCC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-18Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs .........3-20Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T).................................3-24Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (Configured with C5210 or HP CC3310)...................3-25Figure 3-13 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs................................3-31Figure 3-14 Connections of signal cables for the TCR......................................................................................3-34Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box.......................................................................4-3Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..............................................4-5Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR..................................................4-7Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box...........................................................................4-8Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box..........................................................................4-10Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM).............................................................................................................................................................................4-13Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack..........................................................................................................................4-14Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough..............................................................................................................................4-14Figure 4-10 Cabling frame.................................................................................................................................4-15Figure 4-11 KVM...............................................................................................................................................4-15Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM.................................................................................................................4-16Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM..................................................................................................................4-16Figure 4-14 LAN switch.....................................................................................................................................4-17
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Figures
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch.......................................................................................................4-17Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch........................................................................................................4-18Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................................................................................4-19Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).....................................................................................4-20Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM................................................................................................................4-21Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).............................................................................................................4-22Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...............................................................................4-23Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)................................................................................ 4-24Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................................................................................4-25Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)........................................................................................4-26Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).........................................................................................4-27Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack.....................................................................................4-29Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack......................................................................................4-29Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack................................................................................................................5-3Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board).......................................................................................5-5Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board).......................................................................................5-7Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack......................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.................................................................................5-10Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode...............................................5-12Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode..............................................5-13Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode............................................................5-13Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode................................................5-14Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode............................................. 5-14Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode...........................................................5-15Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)..........................................................................................................5-15Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)..........................................................................................................5-16Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board....................................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board..................................................................................................................6-10Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-13Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-16Figure 6-5 Panel of the EIUa board....................................................................................................................6-19Figure 6-6 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board................................................................................6-21Figure 6-7 Panel of the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-25Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-29Figure 6-9 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board...................................................................................................... 6-33Figure 6-10 Panel of the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-36Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-41Figure 6-12 Panel of the MDMC board............................................................................................................. 6-45Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the MDMC board....................................................................................................6-46Figure 6-14 Panel of the OIUa board.................................................................................................................6-48Figure 6-15 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.................................................................................................. 6-53Figure 6-16 Panel of the PAMU board.............................................................................................................. 6-58
FiguresBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..............................................................................6-59Figure 6-18 Panel of the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-61Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.............................................................................6-63Figure 6-20 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-67Figure 6-21 DIP switch on the PFCU board......................................................................................................6-68Figure 6-22 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-70Figure 6-23 Pins on the PFCB board..................................................................................................................6-70Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board................................................................................................................6-73Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board................................................................................................................6-78Figure 6-26 Panel of the TNUa board................................................................................................................6-82Figure 6-27 Panel of the XPUa board................................................................................................................6-86Figure 6-28 Panel of the XPUb board................................................................................................................6-90Figure 7-1 External power cable..........................................................................................................................7-4Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks.......................................................................................................7-5Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack........................................................................7-5Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable.............................................................................................................7-6Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack....................................................................................7-8Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables............................................................................................................................7-8Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable...........................................................................................7-9Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable........................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable..............................................................................................7-12Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables ...............................................7-15Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable.............................................................................................................7-15Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable...................................................................................7-17Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables......................................7-20Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable............................................................................................................................7-21Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables..............................................................................7-22Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable............................................................................................................7-23Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable....................................................................................................7-23Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables....................................................................7-24Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable......................................................................................................................7-25Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables........................................................................7-25Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable...................................................................................................................7-26Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable......................................................................................................7-27Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable..................................................................................................7-27Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the SCUa boards in differentsubracks...............................................................................................................................................................7-28Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................................7-29Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable...................................................................................................................7-30Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable.......................................................................................7-31Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................................7-32Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box......................7-33Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable........................................................................................................7-33
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Figures
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable.................................................................................................................... 7-34Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable..........................................................................................................7-35Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack...................................................................................9-2Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board..................................................................................9-4Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board........................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board..................................................................................9-7Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.................................................................................9-8Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................ 9-11Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board........................................................................................................ 9-11Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-12Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board....................................................................................................................9-13
FiguresBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Tables
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900...............................................................................................................2-2Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations............................................................................3-5Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations...............................................................................3-7Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).............................................................3-8Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power distribution box).............................................................................................................................................................................3-10Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power distribution box).............................................................................................................................................................................3-12Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.........................................3-15Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)........3-17Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HPCC3310)..............................................................................................................................................................3-19Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.........................................................................................3-21Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR.......................................................................................3-26Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR........................................................................................3-32Table 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR........................................................................................3-35Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box....................................................4-4Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)..........................4-5Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR....................................................4-7Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box........................................................4-9Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box......................................................4-10Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.............................................................................................................................................................4-12Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured with the GBAM).............................................................................................................................................................................4-13Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch......................................................................................4-18Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)...................................................4-20Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)..................................................4-22Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................4-23Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)............................................4-25Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................4-26Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).....................................................4-28Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.................................................................4-30Table 5-1 Components of the subrack..................................................................................................................5-4Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)......................................................................5-5
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Tables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)........................................5-6Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)......................................................................5-8Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)........................................5-9Table 5-6 Description about the bits...................................................................................................................5-11Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch...................................................................................................................5-11Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack.............................................................................................5-16Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards.................................................................................................6-1Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................6-7Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board........................................................................................6-8Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board...................................................................................................................6-10Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board......................................................................................6-11Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board..................................................................................................................6-13Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board......................................................................................6-14Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board...................................................................................................................6-16Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board......................................................................................6-17Table 6-10 LEDs on the EIUa board..................................................................................................................6-19Table 6-11 Ports on the EIUa board...................................................................................................................6-20Table 6-12 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board........................................................................6-21Table 6-13 Description of the different DIP switches........................................................................................6-22Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board.....................................................................................6-23Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-23Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2a board..................................................................................................................6-25Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2a board...................................................................................................................6-26Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board.....................................................................................6-27Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-27Table 6-20 LEDs on the FG2c board..................................................................................................................6-29Table 6-21 Ports on the FG2c board...................................................................................................................6-30Table 6-22 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board.....................................................................................6-31Table 6-23 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-31Table 6-24 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.....................................................................................................6-33Table 6-25 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board......................................................................................................6-34Table 6-26 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board........................................................................6-35Table 6-27 LEDs on the GOUa board................................................................................................................6-37Table 6-28 Ports on the GOUa board.................................................................................................................6-37Table 6-29 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board...................................................................................6-38Table 6-30 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-38Table 6-31 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board....................................................................6-38Table 6-32 LEDs on the GOUc board................................................................................................................6-41Table 6-33 Ports on the GOUc board.................................................................................................................6-42Table 6-34 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board...................................................................................6-43Table 6-35 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-43Table 6-36 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board....................................................................6-43
TablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 6-37 LEDs on the MDMC board..............................................................................................................6-45Table 6-38 DIP switch on the MDMC board.....................................................................................................6-46Table 6-39 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................6-48Table 6-40 Ports on the OIUa board...................................................................................................................6-49Table 6-41 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board.....................................................................................6-50Table 6-42 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-50Table 6-43 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.....................................................................6-50Table 6-44 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board...................................................................................................6-54Table 6-45 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board....................................................................................................6-55Table 6-46 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board......................................................... 6-55Table 6-47 Performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board..........................................................................6-56Table 6-48 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................6-58Table 6-49 DIP switch on the PAMU board...................................................................................................... 6-59Table 6-50 Technical specifications of the PAMU board..................................................................................6-60Table 6-51 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................6-62Table 6-52 Ports on the PEUa board..................................................................................................................6-62Table 6-53 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board........................................................................6-64Table 6-54 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board.................................................................................... 6-65Table 6-55 Specifications of the board processing capability............................................................................6-66Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................. 6-67Table 6-57 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)...................................................6-68Table 6-58 Technical specifications of the PFCU board....................................................................................6-68Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................ 6-70Table 6-60 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 6-70Table 6-61 Technical specifications of the PFCB board....................................................................................6-71Table 6-62 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................6-73Table 6-63 Ports on the POUc board..................................................................................................................6-74Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUc board....................................................................................6-74Table 6-65 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission mode..........6-75Table 6-66 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission mode...............6-75Table 6-67 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmission mode........6-76Table 6-68 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board....................................................................6-76Table 6-69 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................6-78Table 6-70 Ports on the SCUa board..................................................................................................................6-79Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the SCUa board....................................................................................6-80Table 6-72 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................ 6-82Table 6-73 Ports on the TNUa board..................................................................................................................6-83Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the TNUa board....................................................................................6-83Table 6-75 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................6-86Table 6-76 Ports on the XPUa board..................................................................................................................6-87Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the XPUa board....................................................................................6-87Table 6-78 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................ 6-90
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Tables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
Table 6-79 Ports on the XPUb board..................................................................................................................6-91Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the XPUb board....................................................................................6-91Table 7-1 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-3Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)......................................................................................................................7-3Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)......................................................................................................................7-4Table 7-4 External power cables..........................................................................................................................7-5Table 7-5 Internal power cables...........................................................................................................................7-6Table 7-6 PGND cables........................................................................................................................................7-7Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables.......................................................................................................................7-9Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables...............................................7-10Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable...........................................................................7-11Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-12Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable.........................................................................7-13Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-13Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable....................................7-16Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-17Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4................................................................7-18Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable............................................................................7-19Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2...........................................................................7-19Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable....................................................................................................7-28Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack..............................................7-29Table 7-20 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-30Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable....................................................................................................7-31Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.................................................7-32Table 7-23 Signals..............................................................................................................................................7-32Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable....................................................................................................7-34Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable.........................................................................................7-35Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board.....................................................................................................................8-3Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board.....................................................................................................................8-3Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board....................................................................................................................8-4Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board.....................................................................................................................8-4Table 8-5 LEDs on the EIUa board......................................................................................................................8-5Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board......................................................................................................................8-6Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board......................................................................................................................8-7Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.........................................................................................................8-7Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board....................................................................................................................8-8Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board..................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-11 LEDs on the MDMC board................................................................................................................8-9Table 8-12 LEDs on the OIUa board..................................................................................................................8-10Table 8-13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board...................................................................................................8-11Table 8-14 LEDs on the PAMU board...............................................................................................................8-11Table 8-15 LEDs on the PEUa board.................................................................................................................8-12
TablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 8-16 LEDs on the POUc board.................................................................................................................8-13Table 8-17 LEDs on the SCUa board.................................................................................................................8-13Table 8-18 LEDs on the TNUa board................................................................................................................ 8-14Table 8-19 LEDs on the XPUa board.................................................................................................................8-15Table 8-20 LEDs on the XPUb board................................................................................................................ 8-16Table 9-1 Description about the bits.....................................................................................................................9-3Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch.....................................................................................................................9-3Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board............................................................................9-4Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches............................................................................................9-5Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board.........................................................................................................9-6Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board..........................................................................................................9-7Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board............................................................................9-9Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)............................................... 9-11Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack).....................................................9-12Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)........................................................ 9-12Table 9-11 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack).............................................................. 9-13
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description Tables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM HardwareDescription
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
03 (2010-09-20)This is the third commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Content Description
6.4.4 Technical Specificationsof the DPUf Board
The information about the processing capability of theDPUf board is modified.
6.21.5 Technical Specificationsof the XPUa Board
The information about the processing capability of themain control XPUa board and the non-main control XPUaboard is modified.
6.22.5 Technical Specificationsof the XPUb Board
The information about the processing capability of themain control XPUb board and the non-main controlXPUb board is modified.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-06-21), this issue does not exclude any topics.
02 (2010-06-21)This is the second commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue includes the following new topics:
l 7.17 OMU serial port cable
Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not incorporate any changes.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-04-10), this issue does not exclude any topics.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
01 (2010-04-10)This is the first commercial release of V900R012C01.
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue includes the following newtopics:
l 4.2 Common Power Distribution Boxl 4.6 KVMl 4.7 LAN Switchl 4.8 GBAMl 6.4 DPUf Boardl 6.11 MDMC Boardl 6.23 WOPB Board
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue incorporates the followingchanges:
Content Description
3.5.3 Connections of SignalCables for the MPR
The description about the connections of signal cables forthe MPR (Configured with the GBAM) is added.
3.5.2 Connections of PowerCables and PGND Cables in theCabinet
The description about the connections of power cablesand PGND cables in the MPR (Configured with theGBAM) is added.
3.5.1 Relation Between PowerOutputs and CabinetComponents
The description about the cabinet configured withcommon power distribution box is added.
6.2 DPUc Board The description about the slots for the DPUc board ismodified.
6.3 DPUd Board The description about the slots for the DPUd board ismodified.
6.13 OMUa/OMUb Board The description about the recommended slots for theOMUa/OMUb board is modified.
6.8 GCUa/GCGa Board The description about the GCGa board is added.
2 Physical Structure Figure of the BSC6900 physical structure is modified.
Compared with issue 03 (2009-12-05) of V900R011C00, this issue does not exclude any topics.
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware DescriptionBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.
Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure
(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)
(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal
Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 2 Physical Structure
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900
Component Description
Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.
Cables For details, see 7 Cables.
GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,and surge protector.The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. Itis optional.
LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminalthat is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminalsoftware and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. TheLMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.
2 Physical StructureBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
3 Cabinet
About This Chapter
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the HuaweiN68E-22 cabinet.
3.1 Appearance of the CabinetThe N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-doorcabinet.
3.2 Classification of CabinetsBased on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extendedprocessing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
3.3 Components of the CabinetWhen the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different fromthose of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components ofthe MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the CabinetThe technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the availablespace, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC).
3.5 Cable Connections of the CabinetThis section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables inthe cabinet.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3.1 Appearance of the CabinetThe N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-doorcabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.
Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet
3.2 Classification of CabinetsBased on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extendedprocessing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.
EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can beconfigured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.
TCR
The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modesof subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not toconfigure a TCR.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of theCabinet.
3.3 Components of the CabinetWhen the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different fromthose of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components ofthe MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCRWhen the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are thesame as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, airdefence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack
(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box
(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough
Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.
Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations
Component Configuration
Power Distribution Box orPower Distribution Box
One common power distribution box or one high-powerpower distribution box is configured.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
Component Configuration
Subrack l The MPR is configured with one main processingsubrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the trafficvolume, it is configured with zero to two extendedprocessing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks(TCSs).
l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs,depending on the traffic volume.
l The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs,depending on the traffic volume.
Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.
Independent Fan Subrack Only one independent fan subrack is configured.
Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.
NOTEThe subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.
Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box,subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cabling frame, GBAM, and rear cable trough.Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)
(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel (3) Cabling frame (4) LAN switch (5) KVM(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack (10) Rear cable trough
Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations.
Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations
Component Configuration
Power Distribution Box Only one common power distribution boxis configured.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
Component Configuration
Subrack The MPR is configured with one MPS. Inaddition, depending on the traffic volume,it is configured with zero to two EPSs orTCSs.
Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.
KVM The KVM is optional. The MPR can beconfigured with one KVM.
LAN switch One LAN switch is configured.
Cabling Frame One cabling frame is configured.
GBAM One GBAM is configured.
Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.
NOTE
The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it isconfigured with the GBAM.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the CabinetThe technical specifications of the cabinet refer to cabinet dimensions, height of the availablespace, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, and ElectromagneticCompatibility (EMC).
Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)
Item Specification
Dimensions 2,200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)
Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)
Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kgl Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg
Rated input voltage -48 V
Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V
EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
3.5 Cable Connections of the CabinetThis section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables inthe cabinet.
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet ComponentsThis section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of powerdistribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the componentsin the cabinet.
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the CabinetThe power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrackand independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independentfan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in theequipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPRThe signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clockcable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPRThe signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clockcable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCRThe signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clockcable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
3.5.1 Relation Between Power Outputs and Cabinet ComponentsThis section describes the fixed relation between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of powerdistribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the componentsin the cabinet.
Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution BoxFor details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.
Figure 3-5 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that isconfigured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relation betweenpower outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power powerdistribution box.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
Figure 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power powerdistribution box)
Table 3-4 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power powerdistribution box)
PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box
Outputof PowerDistribution Box
Subrack Input
63 A -48 V DCoutput 1
A1(-) A7 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on theindependent fan subrack
A8 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2
63 A -48 V DCoutput 2
B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on theindependent fan subrack
B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2
63 A RTN poweroutput 1
A1(+) A7 RTN(+)
RTN power input 1 on theindependent fan subrack
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box
Outputof PowerDistribution Box
Subrack Input
A8 RTN(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack2
63 A RTN poweroutput 2
B1(+) B7 RTN(+)
RTN power input 2 on theindependent fan subrack
B8 RTN(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack2
100 A -48 V DCoutput 1
A3(-) A9 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1
A10 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
100 A -48 V DCoutput 2
B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1
B10 NEG(-)
-48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0
100 A RTN poweroutput 1
A3(+) A9 RTN(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack1
A10 RTN(+)
RTN power input 1 on subrack0
100 A RTN poweroutput 2
B3(+) B9 RTN(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack1
B10 RTN(+)
RTN power input 2 on subrack0
Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution BoxFigure 3-6 shows the relation between power outputs and the components in the MPR that isconfigured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relation betweenpower outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common powerdistribution box.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
Figure 3-6 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common powerdistribution box)
Table 3-5 Relation between power outputs and cabinet components (with common powerdistribution box)
PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box
Outputof PowerDistribution Box
Subrack Input
100 A -48 V DCoutput 1
-48V1 I -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2
II -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1
III -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
100 A -48 V DCoutput 2
-48V2 I -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2
II -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1
III -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0
100 A RTN poweroutput 1
RTN RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack2
RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack1
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
PDF Output Input of PowerDistribution Box
Outputof PowerDistribution Box
Subrack Input
RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack0
100 A RTN poweroutput 2
RTN RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack2
RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack1
RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack0
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the CabinetThe power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrackand independent fan subrack, thus ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and independentfan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the grounding bar in theequipment room, thus protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.
Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with theOMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGNDcables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in theEPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR(configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power powerdistribution box.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with thehigh-power power distribution box)
Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description
5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack
3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack
1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack
13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box andthe mounting bar
14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mountingbar
24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables
27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack
31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack andthe mounting bar
50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels
Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with theGBAM)
Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables andPGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBMX3650T)
Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with IBM X3650T.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBMX3650T)
SN Description
1-8 Power cables for subracks
9, 10 Power cables for the LAN switch
11 Power cable for the KVM
12 Monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box
11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2 Power cables for the GBAM
13 PGND cable connecting the powerdistribution box and the busbar
14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks
18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars ofdifferent cabinets
20 PGND cable for the KVM
21 PGND cable for the LAN switch
22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM
24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and sidepanels
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured withHUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that isconfigured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured withHUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
SN Description
1-8 Power cables for subracks
11 Power cable for the KVM
12 Monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box
11.1.1, 11.2.1 Power cables for the LAN switch
9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3,11.2.3
Power cables for the GBAM
13 PGND cable connecting the powerdistribution box and the busbar
14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks
18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars ofdifferent cabinets
20 PGND cable for the KVM
21 PGND cable for the LAN switch
22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM
24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and sidepanels
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPRThe signal cables for the MPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS clockcable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows the connections of the signal cablesfor an MPR that is configured with one MPS and two EPSs.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for an MPR that is configured with one MPS and twoEPSs
NOTEThe types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR
SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1
Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2
Remarks
1, 2, 3, 4 75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB maleconnector/CLKIN1port on the GCUaboard in slot 13 ofthe MPS
Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port
Figure 3-10shows theclock cablesconnected tothe CLKIN1and CLKIN0ports. Inpractice, onlyone port isused toconnect to theBITS clock.
75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB maleconnector/CLKIN0port on the GCUaboard in slot 13 ofthe MPS
Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port
75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB maleconnector/CLKIN1port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 ofthe MPS
Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port
75-ohm coaxialcable or 120-ohmtwisted pair cableconnecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB maleconnector/CLKIN0port on the GCUaboard in slot 12 ofthe MPS
Connector of theBITS clock/BITSclock port
5 Y-shaped clocksignal cableconnecting theGCUa board to theSCUa board
RJ45/CLKOUT0ports on the GCUaboards in slots 12and 13 of the MPS
RJ45/CLKIN porton the SCUa boardin slot 7 of the EPS
-
6 Y-shaped clocksignal cableconnecting theGCUa board to theSCUa board
RJ45/CLKOUT0ports on the GCUaboards in slots 12and 13 of the MPS
RJ45/CLKIN porton the SCUa boardin slot 6 of the EPS
7 Cable connectingTNUa boards ofdifferent subracks
DB14/TDM port onthe TNUa board inslot 4 or 5 of theMPS
DB14/TDM porton the TNUa boardin slot 4 or 5 of theEPS
-
8 Cable connectingTNUa boards ofdifferent subracks
DB14/TDM port onthe TNUa board inslot 4 or 5 of theMPS
DB14/TDM porton the TNUa boardin slot 4 or 5 of theEPS
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1
Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2
Remarks
9, 10 E1/T1 cables for theEIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 porton the EIUa boardin slot 14 or 15 ofthe MPS
DDF or other NEs -
11 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 porton the EIUa boardin slot 14 or 15 ofthe EPS
DDF or other NEs -
12 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box
DB15/Portconnecting thepower distributionbox to theindependent fansubrack
DB9/MONITOR 1port on theindependent fansubrack
-
13 Optical cablebetween the MPSand the TCS
LC optical port/Slot27 of the MPS
OIUa board in theTCS, ODF, or otherNEs
-
14 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 7 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot6 of the EPS
-
15 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 7 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot7 of the EPS
16 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 6 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot7 of the EPS
17 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 6 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot6 of the EPS
18 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 7 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot6 of the EPS
-
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
SN Description Connector Type1/ConnectionPosition 1
Connector Type2/ConnectionPosition 2
Remarks
19 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 6 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot6 of the EPS
20 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 7 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot7 of the EPS
-
21 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on the SCUaboard in slot 6 of theMPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T port on theSCUa board in slot7 of the EPS
-
22 Ethernet cablebetween the OMUaboard and theM2000/LAN
RJ45/Ethernet porton the OMUa board
RJ45/Ethernet porton the M2000 or ofthe LAN
ETH0 orETH1 port onthe OMUaboard,connecting tothe M2000 orthe LAN
23 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack
DB15/MONITOR0 port on theindependent fansubrack
DB9/Monitor porton the rear of thebottom subrack
The cable ismandatoryand isinstalledbeforedelivery.Only onemonitoringsignal cablefor theindependentfan subrack isconfigured.
Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)Figure 3-11 shows the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured with GBAMIBM X3650T. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configuredwith GBAM C5210 or HP CC3310.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (configured with IBM X3650T)
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the MPR (Configured with C5210 or HP CC3310)
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
NOTE
l Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 presents the connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configuredwith only one MPS and one EPS. When more than one EPS is required, another cabinet is added. Inthis case, the connections of signal cables for the EPS in the new cabinet are similar to the connectionsof signal cables for the EPS in Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12.
l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables for the MPS/EPSin Figure 3-11 and Figure 3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the siteplanning.
Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.
Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR
SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1
Connector Type 2/Connection Position2
Remarks
1, 2, 3, 4 75-ohm coaxial cable or120-ohm twisted paircable connecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB male connector/CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board in slot 13 ofthe MPS
Connectorof the BITSclock/BITSclock port
Figure3-11 showsthe clockcablesconnectedto theCLKIN1andCLKIN0ports. Inpractice,only oneport is usedto connectto the BITSclock.
75-ohm coaxial cable or120-ohm twisted paircable connecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB male connector/CLKIN0 port on theGCUa board in slot 13 ofthe MPS
Connectorof the BITSclock/BITSclock port
75-ohm coaxial cable or120-ohm twisted paircable connecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB male connector/CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board in slot 12 ofthe MPS
Connectorof the BITSclock/BITSclock port
75-ohm coaxial cable or120-ohm twisted paircable connecting theGCUa board to theBITS clock
SMB male connector/CLKIN0 port on theGCUa board in slot 12 ofthe MPS
Connectorof the BITSclock/BITSclock port
5 Y-shaped clock signalcable connecting theGCUa board to theSCUa board
RJ45/CLKOUT ports onthe GCUa boards in slots12 and 13 of the MPS
RJ45/CLKINport on theSCUaboard inslot 6 of theEPS
-
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1
Connector Type 2/Connection Position2
Remarks
6 Y-shaped clock signalcable connecting theGCUa board to theSCUa board
RJ45/CLKOUT ports onthe GCUa boards in slots12 and 13 of the MPS
RJ45/CLKINport on theSCUaboard inslot 7 of theEPS
7 Cable connecting TNUaboards of differentsubracks
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4and 5 of the MPS
DB14/TDM portson theTNUaboards inslots 4 and5 of theEPS
-
8 Cable connecting TNUaboards of differentsubracks
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4and 5 of the MPS
DB14/TDM portson theTNUaboards inslots 4 and5 of theEPS
9 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa or PEUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa or PEUa board inslot 14 of the EPS
DDF orother NEs
-
10 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa or PEUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa or PEUa board inslot 15 of the EPS
DDF orother NEs
11 E1/T1 cable for theEIUa or PEUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa or PEUa board inslot 14 or 15 of the EPS
DDF orother NEs
-
12 Monitoring signal cablefor the powerdistribution box
DB15/Port connecting thepower distribution box toa subrack
DB15/MONITORport on therear of thebottomsubrack
-
13 Optical cable LC optical port/Slot 27 ofthe EPS
OIUa boardin the TCS,ODF, orother NEs
-
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1
Connector Type 2/Connection Position2
Remarks
14 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot7 of the MPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-Tport on theSCUaboard inslot 6 of theEPS
-
15 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot7 of the MPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-Tport on theSCUaboard inslot 7 of theEPS
16 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot6 of the MPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-Tport on theSCUaboard inslot 7 of theEPS
17 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot6 of the MPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-Tport on theSCUaboard inslot 6 of theEPS
18 Ethernet cable betweenSCUa board and GBAM
RJ45/GBAM RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T10 port onthe SCUaboard inslot 6 of theMPS
-
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1
Connector Type 2/Connection Position2
Remarks
19 Ethernet cable betweenSCUa board and GBAM
RJ45/GBAM RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T10 port onthe SCUaboard inslot 7 of theEPS
20 Ethernet cable betweenLAN switch and GBAM
RJ45/Ethernet port on theGBAM
RJ45/Ethernetport on theLANswitch
Port 2 onthe LANswitch isconnectedto theGBAM.
21 Ethernet cable betweenLAN switch and LMTPC
RJ45/Ethernet port on theLAN switch
RJ45/LMTPC
Port 22 onthe LANswitch isconnectedto the LMTPC.
22 Ethernet cable betweenLAN switch andM2000/LAN
RJ45/Ethernet port on theLAN switch
RJ45/Ethernetport on theM2000 orof the LAN
Port 24 onthe LANswitch isconnectedto theM2000 orthe LAN.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
SN Description Connector Type 1/Connection Position 1
Connector Type 2/Connection Position2
Remarks
23 Cable between GBAMand KVM
DB25 male connector/Input port on the KVM
DB15 maleconnector/Port for thevideo, PS2maleconnector/Port used toconnect tothe Y-shapedcable formouse, PS2maleconnector/Port used toconnect tothe Y-shapedcable forkeyboard
-
24 Ethernet cable betweenLAN switch and CBC
RJ45/Ethernet port on theLAN switch
RJ45/Ethernetport on theM2000 orof the LAN
Port 20 onthe LANswitch isconnectedto theCBC.
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPRThe signal cables for the EPR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clockcable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-13 shows the connections of the signal cablesfor an EPR that is configured with three EPSs.
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 3-13 Connections of signal cables for an EPR that is configured with three EPSs
NOTE
The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure3-13 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.
Table 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR
SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1
Connector Type2/Connection Position2
1 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
2 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
3 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
4 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
5 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
6 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
7 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
8 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
9 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1
Connector Type2/Connection Position2
10 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
11 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the MPS
12 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the EPS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the MPS
13, 14,15
E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa board in slot 14 or 15of the EPS
DDF or other NEs
16, 17,18
Cable connectingTNUa boards ofdifferent subracks
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the EPS
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the EPS
19 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box
DB15/Port connecting thepower distribution box tothe independent fan subrack
DB9/MONITOR 1 port onthe independent fansubrack
20 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack
DB15/MONITOR 0 port onthe independent fan subrack
DB9/Monitor port on therear of the bottom subrack
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCRThe signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clockcable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-14 shows the connections of the signal cablesfor the TCR.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
Figure 3-14 Connections of signal cables for the TCR
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure3-14 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwardingthe OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-14, thelowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and theSCUa board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUa boards in other TCSs in star topology.
Table 3-12 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.
Table 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR
SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1
Connector Type2/Connection Position2
1 Monitoring signalcable for the powerdistribution box
DB15/Port connecting thepower distribution box tothe independent fan subrack
DB9/MONITOR 1 port onthe independent fansubrack
2 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the TCS
3 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the TCS
4 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the TCS
5 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the TCS
6 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the TCS
7 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the TCS
8 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 6of the TCS
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 3 Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
SN Description Connector Type1/Connection Position1
Connector Type2/Connection Position2
9 Ethernet cableconnecting SCUaboards of differentsubracks
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the main TCS
RJ45/The10/100/1000BASE-T porton the SCUa board in slot 7of the TCS
10, 11,12
Cable connectingTNUa boards ofdifferent subracks
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the TCS
DB14/TDM ports on theTNUa boards in slots 4 and5 of the TCS
13, 14,15
E1/T1 cable for theEIUa board
DB44/E1/T1 port on theEIUa board in slot 14 or 15of the TCS
DDF or other NEs
16 Optical cablebetween differentsubracks
LC optical port/The RX/TXport on the OIUa board inslot 27 of the TCS
OIUa board of the MPS/EPS or ODF
17 Monitoring signalcable for theindependent fansubrack
DB15/MONITOR 0 port onthe independent fan subrack
DB9/Monitor port on therear of the bottom subrack
3 CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
4 Components of the Cabinet
About This Chapter
Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution boxor high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cabling frame.
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.
4.2 Common Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.
4.3 Air Defence SubrackThe air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-throughair channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.4 Rear Cable TroughThe rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cabletrough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.5 Cabling FrameThe cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
4.6 KVMKVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of theGBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4.7 LAN SwitchThe LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
4.8 GBAMThe BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fansubrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
4.1 High-Power Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.
The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protectionfor the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distributionbox also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible andvisual alarms when faults occur.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel ofthe Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box toa subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thehigh-power power distribution box.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is afixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components ofthe cabinet.
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel ofthe Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.
Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box
(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
NOTE
l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.14 PAMU Board.
l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, theRUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of thepower distribution box.
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm whenit is faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audiblealarm when it is faulty.
The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The PAMU board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUaboard properly.
OFF There is no power supply to the PAMUboard or the power distribution boxdoes not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the powerdistribution box.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution BoxThe components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box toa subrack, and a 2-hole grounding screw.
Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block(3) Port used to connect the power distribution box to a subrack (4) 2-hole grounding screw
NOTE
l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cableare labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cableand RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power PowerDistribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thehigh-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
Item Sub-item Specification
Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC
Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group Aconsists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. GroupB consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Eachgroup has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC powerinputs.
Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is100 A.
Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
Item Sub-item Specification
Output voltagerange
-40 V DC to -72 V DC
Output mode andcurrent
Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each grouphas one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC poweroutputs. The maximum rated output current of eachoutput is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 andB7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surgeprotection function.
Output protectionspecifications
The power surge protection point is 70 A. You needto manually switch on the corresponding MCBafter the power surge protection.
Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)
NOTEFor group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 correspondsto power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputsB1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power PowerDistribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is afixed relation between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components ofthe cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relation between the eight power switches on the power distribution boxand the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relation between the eight powerswitches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Table 4-3 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR
Component Power Switch
Subrack 2 A8, B8
Subrack 1 A9, B9
Subrack 0 A10, B10
Independent fan subrack A7, B7
4.2 Common Power Distribution BoxA high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside eachcabinet at the top.
The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protectionfor the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distributionbox also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible andvisual alarms when faults occur.
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of theDistribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, powerswitches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distributionbox to a subrack.
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution BoxThis section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thecommon power distribution box.
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution BoxThere is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and thecomponents in the cabinet.
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution BoxThe components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of theDistribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, powerswitches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box
(1) Panel of the MDMC board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED (4) Mute switch(5) Labels for power switches (6) Power switches (7) Panel of the WOPB board
NOTE
For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.11 MDMC Board and 6.23 WOPB Board.
CAUTIONl Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the
common power distribution box.l Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that
controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l If you set the mute switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audiblealarm when it is faulty.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generatean audible alarm when it is faulty.
The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The MDMC is not working or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa boardproperly.
OFF There is no power supply to the MDMCboard or the common power distributionbox does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the commonpower distribution box.
ON The common power distribution box isfaulty. During the self-check of theMDMC board, however, the ALM LEDis also on. This indicates that the ALMLED is functional.
NOTE
When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUNand ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common powerdistribution box.
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution BoxThe components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power inputterminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distributionbox to a subrack.
Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box
(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the powerdistribution box to a subrack
NOTE
l Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoringsignal cable for the power distribution box.
On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals forthe -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power DistributionBox
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of thecommon power distribution box.
Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box
Item Sub-item Specification
Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
Input mode Two -48 V DC inputs
Max. input current Two power inputs. Themaximum current of eachinput is 100 A.
Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Item Sub-item Specification
Output voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
Output mode and current Six groups of independentpower outputs. Each grouphas one -48 V DC poweroutput and one RTN poweroutput. Each output can beswitched on or off, and isprovided with the powersurge protection function.When the total current of thesix outputs is smaller than100 A, the maximum currentof each output is 70 A.
Output protectionspecifications
The power surge protectionpoint is 87.5 A. You need tomanually switch on thecorresponding MCB afterthe power surge protection.
Rated output power Hot backup mode: 4,800 W
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common PowerDistribution Box
There is a fixed relation between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and thecomponents in the cabinet.
Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on thecommon power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switcheson the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relation betweenthe six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.Table 4-6 describes the relation between the six power switches on the common powerdistribution box and the components in the cabinet.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
Figure 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured withthe OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Table 4-6 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured withthe OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Component Power Switch
Subrack 2 SW1, SW4
Subrack 1 SW2, SW5
Subrack 0 SW3, SW6
Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)Figure 4-7 shows the relation between the six power switches on the common power distributionbox and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table 4-7 describesthe relation between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and thecomponents in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured withthe GBAM)
Table 4-7 Relation between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured withthe GBAM)
Component Power Switch
Subrack 1 SW1, SW4
Subrack 0 SW2, SW5
KVM SW3
LAN switch SW3
GBAM SW3, SW6
4.3 Air Defence SubrackThe air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-throughair channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
Physical appearance
Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack
DimensionsThe dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm(depth).
4.4 Rear Cable TroughThe rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cabletrough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough.
Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough
4.5 Cabling FrameThe cabling frame provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
Figure 4-10 shows the cabling frame.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 4-10 Cabling frame
4.6 KVMKVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of theGBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
Appearance
Figure 4-11 shows the KVM.
Figure 4-11 KVM
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-15
Front Panel
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM
(1) Handles (2) Switch on the KVM
Back Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM.
Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM
(1) Grounding bolt (2) DC input power socket(3) Power switch (4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse
NOTE
To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttonswith index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.
4.7 LAN SwitchThe LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LANswitch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.
Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch
The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches.
Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 4-14 LAN switch
Front Panel of the LAN Switch
The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configurationport, LEDs, and Ethernet ports.
Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch
(1) POWER LED (2) Mode status LED (A/L LED)(3) Mode status LED (D/S LED) (4) Mode switch button (MODE button)(5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports (6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)
NOTE
l The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of theBSC6900.
l The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display differenttypes of states.
LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch
There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/SLED.
Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-17
Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch
LED Color Status Description
POWER GreenON The LAN switch is powered on.
OFF The LAN switch is powered off.
A/L
Yellow(left)
ON (blink) The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic overthe port.
OFF The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no trafficover the port.
Green(right)
ON The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correctconnection).
OFF The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating noconnection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicatingincorrect connection).
D/S
Yellow(left)
ON The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.
OFF The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.
Green(right)
ON The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s.
OFF The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.
NOTE
Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.
Rear Panel of the LAN SwitchThe components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding postfor the PGND cable.
Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch.
Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch
(1) DC power socket (2) Grounding post for the PGND cable
4.8 GBAMThe BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
4.8.1 Functions of GBAMThe GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
4.8.1 Functions of GBAMThe GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The GBAM performs the following functions:
l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of theBSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUaboard of the BSC6900
4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)
Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, anda CD-ROM drive.
Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T).
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-19
Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No. Silkscreen Label Description
1 None CD-ROM drive
2 Power switch
3 Reset switch
4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarmindication. When this LED is on (yellow), itindicates that a critical fault occurs in the systemand the system cannot work properly.
5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that amajor fault occurs in the system. Under thiscircumstance, the system can still work properly;however, the performance deterioratessignificantly.
6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarmindication. When this LED is on (yellow), itindicates that a minor fault occurs in the system.Under this circumstance, the system can still workproperly.
7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarmindication. When this LED is on (yellow), itindicates that the power supply for the system isfaulty.
8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9 USB port
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
No. Silkscreen Label Description
10 0 Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 canbe normally read or written. When this LED is on(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty.
11 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 1 canbe normally read or written. When this LED is on(yellow), it indicates that hard disk 1 is faulty.
12 ON Main power LED
13 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
14 System ID LED
15 ID switch, used to switch system IDs
16 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop thesystem for fault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post,and other ports.
Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM
Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-21
Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No. SilkscreenLabel
Description
1 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)
2 None PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)
3 None PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)
4 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
5 None Power module
6 PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for themouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.
7 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
8 1 RJ45 NIC port 1
9 2 RJ45 NIC port 2
10 Port for the video
11 1 USB port 1
12 0 USB port 0
13 Server management port
14 Ultra320 SCSI port
15 Grounding post for the PGND cable
4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CD-ROM drive.
Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
No.SilkscreenLabel Description
1 None CD-ROM drive
2 Power switch
3 Reset switch
4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When theLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a critical fault occurs inthe system and the system cannot work properly.
5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in thesystem. Under this circumstance, the system can still workproperly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.
6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in thesystem. Under this circumstance, the system can still workproperly.
7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for thesystem is faulty.
8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9 USB port
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-23
No.SilkscreenLabel Description
10
11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read orwritten. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that harddisk 2 is faulty.
12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read orwritten. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that harddisk 1 is faulty.
13 ON Main power LED
14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
15 System ID LED
16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs
17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system forfault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, groundingpost, and other ports.
Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)
No. SilkscreenLabel
Description
1 1 USB port 1
2 Port for the video
3 Ultra320 SCSI port
4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1
5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to theGBAM (C5210).
6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
7 2 USB port 2
8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
9 Grounding post for the PGND cable
10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 Vpower cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.)
11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)
12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)
Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)The components on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, anda CD-ROM drive.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-25
Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No.SilkscreenLabel Description
1 None CD-ROM drive
2 Power switch
3 Reset switch
4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When theLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a critical fault occurs in thesystem and the system cannot work properly.
5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a major fault occurs in thesystem. Under this circumstance, the system can still workproperly; however, the performance deteriorates significantly.
6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that a minor fault occurs in thesystem. Under this circumstance, the system can still workproperly.
7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When thisLED is on (yellow), it indicates that the power supply for thesystem is faulty.
8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
9 USB port
10
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
No.SilkscreenLabel Description
11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read orwritten. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that harddisk 2 is faulty.
12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), itindicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read orwritten. When this LED is on (yellow), it indicates that harddisk 1 is faulty.
13 ON Main power LED
14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED
15 System ID LED
16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs
17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system forfault diagnosis.
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post,and other ports.
Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-27
Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No. Silkscreen Label Description
1 1 USB port 1
2 Port for the video
3 Ultra320 SCSI port
4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1
5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use aY-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard tothe GBAM (HP CC3310).
6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector
7 2 USB port 2
8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter
9 Grounding post for the PGND cable
10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTNcable.)
11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from theGBAM)
12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0
4.9 Independent Fan SubrackBesides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fansubrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan SubrackThe independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan SubrackThe technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC).
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan SubrackThe independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.
The fan box can be configured with either the PFCU or the PFCB board, which does not affectthe appearance of the independent fan subrack.
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack
Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack
(1) PFCB or PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box
NOTE
l The PFCU or the PFCB is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16PFCU Board. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.17 PFCB Board.
l When the PFCU board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on thefan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. Fordetails, see 5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board).
l When the PFCB board is configured in the fan box of the independent fan subrack, the LEDs on thefan box of the independent fan subrack are the same as those on the fan box in service subracks. Fordetails, see 5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board).
Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack
Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack
(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the powerdistribution box
(2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)
(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan SubrackThe technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility(EMC).
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-29
Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.
Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack
Item Specification
Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)
Weight Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9kg
Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60V DC.
Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W
Fan speed < 5.0 m/s
EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1(2000-03).
4 Components of the CabinetBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
4-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
5 Subracks
About This Chapter
This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form anindependent unit.
5.1 Classification of SubracksBased on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extendedprocessing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
5.2 Components of the SubrackThe main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Fan BoxThe fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fanbox.
5.4 Slots in the SubrackThe backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the frontand rear sides of the backplane.
5.5 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.6 Configuration of the SubrackBSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typicalconfigurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
5.7 Technical Specifications of the SubrackThe technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available spaceheight, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
5.1 Classification of SubracksBased on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extendedprocessing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
MPSAs the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configuredin the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation andmaintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.
EPSAs the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes thebasic services of the BSC6900.
TCSAs the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separatedconfiguration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.
5.2 Components of the SubrackThe main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
Structure of the SubrackIn compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U inheight. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of thecomponent layouts of the subrack.
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack
(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Grounding screw
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of thepower distribution box
(9) Cover plate of the DIP switch
Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.
Table 5-1 Components of the subrack
Component Refer to...
Fan box 5.3 Fan Box
Slots in the subrack 5.4 Slots in the Subrack
Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cablesfrom the front of the subrack to both sides of thecabinet.
Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards inthe same subrack.
5.3 Fan BoxThe fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fanbox.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box whenthe fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specificationsof the fan box.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box whenthe fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specificationsof the fan box.
5.3.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box whenthe fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical specificationsof the fan box.
Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box
NOTE
l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans andkeeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.
l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.16 PFCUBoard.
LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Color Status Description
Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (thefan box is registered).
ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (thefan box is not registered).
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
Color Status Description
Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and hasone of the following problems:l One-way power supply to
the subrackl Communication failurel Fans ceasing to run or
running at too low a speedl Fan box in an excessively
high temperature ortemperature sensor failure
ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered andhas one of the followingproblems:l One-way power supply to
the subrackl Fans ceasing to run or
running at a too low speedl Fan box in an excessively
high temperature ortemperature sensor failure
NOTE
When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the samesubrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and theSCUa board in the same subrack is not established.
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.
Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Item Specification
Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC
Maximum power 150 W
Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C
Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from55% to 100% of the full speed.
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fansin the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.
5.3.2 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box whenthe fan box is configured with the PFCB board. This also describes the technical specificationsof the fan box.
Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-3 shows the fan box.
Figure 5-3 Fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
(1) PFCB Board (2) Fans (3) LED on the fan box(4) Screw (5) Handles of the fan box
NOTE
l The PFCB board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCB board, see 6.17 PFCBBoard.
LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-4 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
Table 5-4 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Color Status Description
Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The fan box is supplied with power intwo ways without any fault (and isregistered).
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The fan box is supplied with power intwo ways without any fault (notregistered).
Red ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The fan box is registered and has one ofthe following problems:l One-way power supply to the
subrackl Communication failurel Fans ceasing to run or running at too
low a speedl Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensorfailure
l Speed adjustment function failure
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The fan box is not registered and has oneof the following problems:l One-way power supply to the
subrackl Fans ceasing to run or running at a
too low speedl Fan box in an excessively high
temperature or temperature sensorfailure
l Speed adjustment function failure
NOTE
When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa board in the samesubrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box and theSCUa board in the same subrack is not established.
Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, input voltage range,maximum power, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-5 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 5-5 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCB board)
Item Specification
Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
Maximum power 150 W
Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C
Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from55% to 100% of the full speed.
NOTE
When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fansin the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.
5.4 Slots in the SubrackThe backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the frontand rear sides of the backplane.
Figure 5-4 shows the structure of the subrack.
Figure 5-4 Structure of the subrack
(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
NOTE
l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numberedfrom 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pairof active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active andstandby slots.
5.5 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Location of the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of theDIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.
AppearanceFigure 5-5 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 5-5 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack
Description about the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-6 describes the bits.
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 5-6 Description about the bits
Bit Description
1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is theleast significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.
6 Odd parity check bit
7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
8 (the most significantbit)
Reserved
Principle of the DIP Switch SettingAs the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an oddnumber. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.2. Set bit 7 to ON.3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 5-7describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 5-7 Setting of the DIP switch
SubrackNo.
Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
5.6 Configuration of the SubrackBSC6900 subracks are classified into the MPS, EPS, and TCS. This section describes the typicalconfigurations of these subracks in different configuration modes.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPSThe configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of theBSC6900 subracks.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPSThe configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of theBSC6900 subracks.
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCSIn BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
5.6.1 Configuration of the MPSThe configuration of the boards in the MPS varies with the configuration modes of theBSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUa/OMUb board, SCUa board, GCUaboard, GCGa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUb board, DPUc board, DPUd board, DPUf board,EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUc board, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
The following figures show the MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TCcombined, and A over IP configuration modes.
Figure 5-6 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 5-7 MPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode
Figure 5-8 MPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode
NOTE
l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUcboard, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in theMPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how tomaintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
5.6.2 Configuration of the EPSThe configuration of the boards in the EPS varies with the configuration modes of theBSC6900 subracks.
The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUa board, TNUa board, XPUa/XPUbboard, DPUc board, DPUd board, DPUf board, EIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, GOUa/GOUcboard, POUc board, OIUa board, and PEUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
The following figures show the EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated, BM/TCcombined, and A over IP configuration modes.
Figure 5-9 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC separated configuration mode
Figure 5-10 EPS in full configuration in BM/TC combined configuration mode
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 5-11 EPS in full configuration in A over IP configuration mode
NOTE
l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa board, EIUa board, OIUa board, FG2a/FG2c board, POUcboard, or GOUa/GOUc board.
l If customers purchase also the Nastar product of Huawei, customers need to install the SAU board in theMPS or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode).For details on how to install the SAU board, how to install the software on the SAU board, and how tomaintain the SAU board, see the SAU User Guide of Nastar documents.
5.6.3 Configuration of the TCSIn BM/TC separated configuration mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUa board and TNUa board. The DPUa/DPUc/DPUf board and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.
Figure 5-12 shows the TCS in full configuration when E1/T1 transmission is used on the Ainterface.
Figure 5-12 TCS in full configuration (1)
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 5 Subracks
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
Figure 5-13 shows the TCS in full configuration when STM-1 transmission is used on the Ainterface.
Figure 5-13 TCS in full configuration (2)
5.7 Technical Specifications of the SubrackThe technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available spaceheight, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-8 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.
Table 5-8 Technical specifications of the subrack
Item Specification
Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)
Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)
Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:≤ 57 kg
Power consumption in fullconfiguration
l MPS: ≤ 1,200 Wl EPS: ≤ 1,200 Wl TCS: ≤ 1,000 W
5 SubracksBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6 Boards
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.
The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.
Table 6-1 Classification of the BSC6900 boards
Board Logical Function FunctionDescription
Board Name
DPUc GTC (GSM BSC TC) GSM speech serviceprocessing
Data Processing UnitREV: c
DPUd GPCU (GSM BSC PCU) GSM packet serviceprocessing
Data Processing UnitREV:d
EIUa Abis_TDM - 32-port E1/T1 circuitInterface Unit REV:a
Ater_TDM -
Pb_TDM -
A_TDM -
FG2a GbIP (GSM BSC Gb IPinterface)
- 8-port FE or 2-portelectronic GE interfaceunit REV:a
IP -
FG2c IP - 12-port FE or 4-portelectronic GE interfaceunit REV:c
GCUa Clock - General Clock UnitREV:a
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
Board Logical Function FunctionDescription
Board Name
GOUa IP - 2-port packet over GEOptical interface UnitREV:a
GOUc IP - 4-port packet over GEOptical interface UnitREV:c
OIUa Abis_TDM - 1-port channelizedOptical STM-1 InterfaceUnit REV:aAter_TDM -
Pb_TDM -
A_TDM -
OMUa OAM (Operation,Administration andMaintenance)
OM management Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:a
OMUb OAM (Operation,Administration andMaintenance)
OM management Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:b
PEUa FR - 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface UnitREV:aHDLC -
IP -
POUc TDM - 4-port IP overchannelized OpticalSTM-1/OC-3 interfaceUnit REV:c
IP -
SCUa MAC Switching - GE Switching networkand Control Unit REV:a
TNUa TDM Switching - TDM switching NetworkUnit REV:a
XPUa GCP (GSM BSC Controlplane Process)
GSM BSC controlplane processing
eXtensible ProcessingUnit REV:a
RGCP (ResourceManagement and GSMBSC Control plane Process)
Resourcemanagement andGSM BSC controlplane processing
MCP (MathematicsComputing Process)
Mathematicalcomputing
XPUb GCP (GSM BSC Controlplane Process)
GSM BSC controlplane processing
eXtensible ProcessingUnit REV:b
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Board Logical Function FunctionDescription
Board Name
RGCP (ResourceManagement and GSMBSC Control plane Process)
Resourcemanagement andGSM BSC controlplane processing
MCP (MathematicsComputing Process)
Mathematicalcomputing
PAMU - - Power AllocationMonitoring Unit
PFCU - - Fan Control Unit
PFCB - - Fan Control Board
6.1 DPUa BoardDPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in theTCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installedin the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.2 DPUc BoardDPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8to 27.
6.3 DPUd BoardDPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.4 DPUf BoardDPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two toten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.5 EIUa BoardEIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It canbe installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on siterequirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS orTCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.6 FG2a BoardFG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board isoptional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to beinstalled depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.7 FG2c BoardFG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installed
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
depends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/EPS.
6.8 GCUa/GCGa BoardGCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12and 13 in the MPS.
6.9 GOUa BoardGOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed dependson site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For theEPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.10 GOUc BoardGOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to beinstalled depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in theMPS/EPS.
6.11 MDMC BoardMDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in thecommon power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with oneMDMC board.
6.12 OIUa BoardOIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.13 OMUa/OMUb BoardOMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in theBSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
6.14 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the powerdistribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMUboard.
6.15 PEUa BoardPEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.16 PFCU BoardPFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.17 PFCB BoardPFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.18 POUc Board
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
POUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. ThePOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUcboards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can beinstalled in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
6.19 SCUa BoardSCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.20 TNUa BoardTNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or twoTNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6.21 XPUa BoardXPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to tenXPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installedin slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.22 XPUb BoardXPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to tenXPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards canbe installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can beinstalled in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.23 WOPB BoardWOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common powerdistribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-5
6.1 DPUa BoardDPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in theTCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installedin the TCS, the DPUa boards are installed in slots 1 to 3 and slots 8 to 13.
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa BoardThe DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa BoardThe DPUa board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUa board performs the following functions:l Encodes and decodes voice servicesl Provides data service rate adaptationl Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l Provides the voice enhancement functionl Detects voice faults automatically
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-7
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board in active mode.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board.
Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 60 W
Weight 1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
6.2 DPUc BoardDPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be installed in
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc BoardThe DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc BoardThere are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc BoardThe DPUc board processes GSM voice services and data services.
The DPUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functionsThe DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the followingconfiguration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abisover HDLC.
l Encodes and decodes voice servicesThe DPUc board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the followingconfiguration modes: BM/TC combined or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUc boardin the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.
l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) functionWhen the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.
l Provides the voice enhancement functionl Detects voice faults automatically
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc BoardThere are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-9
Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.
Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 49.40 W
Weight 1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740 IWFflow numbers
6.3 DPUd BoardDPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-11
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd BoardThe DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd BoardThe DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
The DPUd board performs the following functions:
l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals arecoded in MCS9
l Processes packet linksl Detects packet faults automatically
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-13
LED Color Status Description
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.
Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 49.40 W
Weight 1.26 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Processing capability Processing the PS services on up to 1,024simultaneously active PDCHs where signals arecoded in MCS9
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.4 DPUf BoardDPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f. The DPUf board is optional. For the MPS, two toten DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,two to twelve DPUf boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf BoardThe DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf BoardThe DPUf board processes GSM voice services and GSM data services.
The DPUf board performs the following functions:
l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions
The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding functions in any of the followingconfiguration modes: BM/TC combined, A over IP and Abis over IP, or A over IP and Abisover HDLC.
l Encodes and decodes voice services
The DPUf board in the MPS/EPS performs the preceding function in either of the followingconfiguration modes: BM/TC combined, or A over IP and Abis over TDM. The DPUfboard in the TCS performs the preceding function in BM/TC separated configuration mode.
l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signalsare encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l Provides the voice enhancement function
l Detects voice faults automatically
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf BoardThere are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-15
Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf BoardThe technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.
Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board.
Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 80 W
Weight 1.20 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Processing capability l Supporting 1,920 TCHFsl Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the
case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis overTDM or Ater over TDM
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-17
6.5 EIUa BoardEIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a. The EIUa board is optional. It canbe installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of EIUa boards to be installed depends on siterequirements. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS orTCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.5.1 Functions of the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
6.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.5.4 Ports on the EIUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUTport on the EIUa board.
6.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
6.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
6.5.1 Functions of the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
The EIUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmissionl Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048
Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/sl Processes signals according to the LAPD protocoll Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocoll Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa
boardsl Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC sidel Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces
6.5.2 Panel of the EIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.
Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the EIUa board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-5 Panel of the EIUa board
6.5.3 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Table 6-10 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-19
LED Color Status Description
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
6.5.4 Ports on the EIUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUTport on the EIUa board.
Table 6-11 describes the ports on the EIUa board.
Table 6-11 Ports on the EIUa board
Port Function Connector Type
E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 0-7
DB44
E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 8-15
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 16-23
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit andreceive E1/T1 signals onchannels 24-31
DB44
2M0 and 2M1 Ports for the 2.048 MHz clocksignal outputs, used to transmitthe clock signals obtained fromthe line clock for systemreference
SMB male connector
TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs.The clock signals are used fortesting.
SMB male connector
6.5.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 6-6 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-6 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate
NOTE
l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In thiscase, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced toand combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Table 6-12 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Table 6-12 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable
Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable
S1 8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0-7
ON OFF
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-21
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable
Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable
7 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8-15
ON OFF
6 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s16-23
ON OFF
5 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s24-31
ON OFF
1-4 Reserved
S3 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 0-7
ON OFF
S4 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 8-15
ON OFF
S5 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 16-23
ON OFF
S6 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 24-31
ON OFF
Table 6-13 describes the different DIP switches.
Table 6-13 Description of the different DIP switches
DIP Switch Description
E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of theboard and to notify the software of the currenttransmission mode
E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting endof the E1/T1 signals
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switcheson the standby board.
l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.
6.5.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
Table 6-14 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.
Table 6-14 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 28.60 W
Weight 1.16 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Table 6-15 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-15 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 384
A CIC(64K) 960
Ater CIC(16K) 3,840
Pb CIC(16K) 3,840
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-23
6.6 FG2a BoardFG2a refers to 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV:a. The FG2a board isoptional. It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of FG2a boards to beinstalled depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a BoardAs an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a BoardThere are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clocksignal output ports on the FG2a board.
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
6.6.1 Functions of the FG2a BoardAs an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
The FG2a board performs the following functions:
l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE portsl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layerl Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces
6.6.2 Panel of the FG2a BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
Figure 6-7 shows the panel of the FG2a board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-7 Panel of the FG2a board
6.6.3 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-16 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 6-16 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-25
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
6.6.4 Ports on the FG2a BoardThere are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clocksignal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-17 describes the ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-17 Ports on the FG2a board
Port Function ConnectorType
FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit10/100M signals
RJ45
FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used totransmit 10/100/1000M signals
RJ45
2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB maleconnector
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.6.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
Table 6-18 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.
Table 6-18 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 38.48 W
Weight 1.36 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Table 6-19 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-19 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 384
A CIC(64K) 6,144
Gb Maximum payload throughput(physical layer)
128 Mbit/s
6.7 FG2c BoardFG2c refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c. The FG2c board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of FG2c boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. The FG2c board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in the MPS/EPS.
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c Board
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-27
As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c BoardThere are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2c BoardAs an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2c board performs the following functions:
l Provides 12 channels over FE ports or four channels over GE portsl Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layerl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized
clock signalsl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE
l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well astransmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2c BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2c board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2c board
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-20 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
Table 6-20 LEDs on the FG2c board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-29
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2c BoardThere are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-21 describes the ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-21 Ports on the FG2c board
Port Function ConnectorType
100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100Msignals
RJ45
100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used totransmit 100/1000M signals
RJ45
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c BoardThe technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
Table 6-22 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.
Table 6-22 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 85.4 W
Weight 1.50 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Table 6-23 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-23 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 2,048
A CIC(64K) 23,040
Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)
1,024 Mbit/s
6.8 GCUa/GCGa BoardGCUa refers to General Clock Unit REV:a. GCGa refers to General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a.The GCUa/GCGa board is mandatory. Two GCUa/GCGa boards must be installed in slots 12and 13 in the MPS.
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-31
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
6.8.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.
The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:
l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from thesynchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signalsand the reference clock for the entire system
l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clockl Generates RFN signals for the systeml Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phasein the case of active/standby switchover.
l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPScard
6.8.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-9 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board
6.8.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-24 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-24 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-33
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
6.8.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-25 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-25 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board
Port Function Connector Type
ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGaboard is used to receive the timing signals andpositioning information from the GPS satellite. Thisport is not used on the GCUa board.
SMA maleconnector
CLKOUT0 toCLKOUT9
Ports for providing synchronization clock signals.The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signalsand 1PPS clock signals.
RJ45
COM0 Reserved RJ45
COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45
TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals areused for testing.
SMB maleconnector
TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB maleconnector
CLKIN0 andCLKIN1
Input port for BITS clock signals and line clocksignals
SMB maleconnector
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa BoardThe technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.
Table 6-26 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-26 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W
Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C-45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Clock accuracy grade Grade three
6.9 GOUa BoardGOUa refers to 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:a. The GOUa board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. The number of GOUa boards to be installed dependson site requirements. For the MPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For theEPS, the GOUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa BoardThere are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-35
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
6.9.1 Functions of the GOUa BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.
The GOUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmissionl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the A and Abis interfaces
6.9.2 Panel of the GOUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the GOUa board.
Figure 6-10 Panel of the GOUa board
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.9.3 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-27 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 6-27 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
6.9.4 Ports on the GOUa BoardThere are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-28 describes the ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-28 Ports on the GOUa board
Port Function Connector Type
RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
LC/PC
TX
2M0 and2M1
Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-37
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
Table 6-29 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.
Table 6-29 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplaneof the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 37.30 W
Weight 1.20 kg
Operating temperature(long-term)
0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature(short-term)
-5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity(short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-30 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-30 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 384
A CIC(64K) 6,144
Table 6-31 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-31 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUa board
Item Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Mode Multi-mode Single mode
Type LC/PC LC/PC
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Item Specification
Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-1310nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Maximum opticaltransmissiondistance
0.5 km 10 km
Maximum outputoptical power
-2.5 dBm -3.0 dBm
Minimum outputoptical power
-9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm
Minimum receiversensitivity
-17.0 dBm -20.0 dBm
Overload receiveoptical power
0.0 dBm -3.0 dBm
Center wavelength 850 nm 1,310 nm
Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s
6.10 GOUc BoardGOUc refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:c. The GOUc board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of GOUc boards to beinstalled depends on site requirements. The GOUc board can be installed in slots 16 to 23 in theMPS/EPS.
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
6.10.1 Functions of the GOUc BoardAs an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-39
The GOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over GE portsl Provides the routing-based backup and load sharingl Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE
l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well astransmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
6.10.2 Panel of the GOUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.
Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GOUc board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-11 Panel of the GOUc board
6.10.3 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-32 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
Table 6-32 LEDs on the GOUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-41
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (opticalport LED)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (opticalport LED)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
6.10.4 Ports on the GOUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-33 describes the ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-33 Ports on the GOUc board
Port Function Connector Type
RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
LC/PC
TX
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc BoardThe technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 6-34 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.
Table 6-34 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. Thebackplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 65.90 W
Weight 1.40 kg
Operating temperature(long-term)
0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature(short-term)
-5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity(short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-35 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-35 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 2,048
A CIC(64K) 23,040
Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)
1,024 Mbit/s
Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-36 Specifications of the optical ports on the GOUc board
Item Specification
Optical Module 1.25G-1310 nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Mode Single mode Multi-mode
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-43
Item Specification
Optical Module 1.25G-1310 nm-10 km-SM-ESFP
Optical Module 1.25 G-850nm-0.5 km-MM-ESFP
Type LC/PC LC/PC
Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm
Transmission rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s
Transmissiondistance
10 km 0.5 km
Maximum outputoptical power
-3 dBm -3 dBm
Minimum outputoptical power
-9.5 dBm -9 dBm
Minimum receiversensitivity
-23 dBm -20 dBm
6.11 MDMC BoardMDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in thecommon power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with oneMDMC board.
6.11.1 Functions of the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
6.11.2 Panel of the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
6.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
6.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
6.11.1 Functions of the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.
The MDMC board performs the following functions:
l Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputsl Detects one output of external temperature sensorl Detects one output of external humidity sensorl Detects two lightning protection circuitsl Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
l Provides audible and visual alarms
l Communicates with the SCUa board, so as to report the working status of the powerdistribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information
6.11.2 Panel of the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the MDMC board.
Figure 6-12 Panel of the MDMC board
(1) Mute switch
NOTE
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it isfaulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm whenit is faulty.
6.11.3 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-37 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 6-37 LEDs on the MDMC board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-45
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The MDMC board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUaboard properly.
OFF The power supply to the MDMC boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the MDMCboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.
6.11.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 6-13 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 6-13 DIP switch on the MDMC board
With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-38.
Table 6-38 DIP switch on the MDMC board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-38.
6.12 OIUa BoardOIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a. The OIUa board isoptional. It can be installed in the MPS/EPS/TCS. The number of OIUa boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.For the EPS/TCS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.12.1 Functions of the OIUa BoardThe OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
6.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.12.4 Ports on the OIUa BoardThere are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUaboard.
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
6.12.1 Functions of the OIUa BoardThe OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.
The OIUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmissionl Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby OIUa boardsl Provides one channelized STM-1 with the transmission rate of 155.52 Mbit/sl Processes signals according to the LAPD protocoll Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocoll Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC sidel Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces
6.12.2 Panel of the OIUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.
Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the OIUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-47
Figure 6-14 Panel of the OIUa board
6.12.3 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 6-39 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
Table 6-39 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.
6.12.4 Ports on the OIUa BoardThere are one optical port, two clock signal output ports, and one TESTOUT port on the OIUaboard.
Table 6-40 describes the ports on the OIUa board.
Table 6-40 Ports on the OIUa board
Port Function ConnectorType
RX TX refers to the transmitting optical port, and RX refers to thereceiving optical port.
LC
TX
2M0 and2M1
Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal outputs, used to transmitthe clock signals obtained from the line clock for systemreference
SMB maleconnector
TESTOUT
Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used fortesting.
SMB maleconnector
6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa BoardThe technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
Table 6-41 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-49
Table 6-41 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplaneof the subrack is responsible for the power supply.
Power consumption 20.80 W
Weight 0.94 kg
Operating temperature(long-term)
0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature(short-term)
-5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term)
5% to 85%
Relative humidity(short-term)
5% to 95%
Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-42 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 384
A CIC(64K) 1,920
Ater CIC(16K) 7,168
Pb CIC(16K) 7,168
Table 6-43 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board.
Table 6-43 Specifications of the optical ports on the OIUa board
Item Specification
Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP
Optical Module 155 M-1310nm-2 km-MM-SFP
Mode Single mode Multi-mode
Type LC/PC LC/PC
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Item Specification
Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP
Optical Module 155 M-1310nm-2 km-MM-SFP
Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm
Transmission rate 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s
Transmissiondistance
15 km 2 km
Maximum outputoptical power
-8 dBm -14 dBm
Minimum outputoptical power
-15 dBm -19 dBm
Maximum receiversensitivity
-31 dBm -30 dBm
6.13 OMUa/OMUb BoardOMUa refers to Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb refers to Operation andMaintenance Unit REV:b. One or two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in theBSC6900. The width of the OMUa/OMUb board is twice the width of other boards. Therefore,one OMUa/OMUb board occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS. Slots 20 to 23 are recommended.
NOTEThis document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUa/OMUb boards are installedin slots 20 to 23.
6.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThe OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the LocalMaintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
6.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, thereare hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.
6.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and oneVGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThis section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of theOMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard diskcapacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-51
6.13.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThe OMUa/OMUb board works as a bridge for the communication between the LocalMaintenance Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.
The OMUa board performs the following functions:
l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of theBSC6900 system, to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUaboard of the BSC6900
6.13.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, thereare hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-15 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board
(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET Button (8) SHUTDOWN Button(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for fixing the hard disk
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-53
NOTE
l To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejectorlevers away from the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn offthe power switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works in the same way as the reset button on the PC.
l Powering off the board by pressing the SHUTDOWN button or resetting the system by pressing theRESET button may scratch the surface of the hard disks of the OMUa board. Thus, avoid operatingthe two buttons whenever possible.
6.13.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.
Table 6-44 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-44 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.
OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.
HD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.
Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.13.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and oneVGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-45 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-45 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board
Port Function Connector Type
USB0-1 and USB2-3 USB ports. These ports are used toconnect USB devices.
-
ETH0 to ETH2 GE ports RJ45
COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC Serial port. This port is used forsystem commissioning or forcommon serial port usage.
DB9
VGA Port for the video -
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb BoardThis section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of theOMUa/OMUb board, including size, power supply, power consumption, weight, hard diskcapacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working humidity.
Hardware Configuration Indexes
Table 6-46 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-46 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board
Index Index of the OMUa Board Index of the OMUb Board
Size 366.7 mm x 220 mm 366.7 mm x 220 mm
Power supply Two routes of -48 V DC inredundancy backup mode(provided by the backplaneof the subrack)
Two routes of -48 V DC inredundancy backup mode(provided by the backplaneof the subrack)
Power consumption 120 W 90 W
Weight 4.0 kg 3.5 kg
Hard disk capacity 146 GB x 2 (RAID 1) 146 GB x 2 (RAID 1)
Memory capacity 2 GB 2 GB
Temperature required whenworking for a long time
0°C - +45°C 0°C - +45°C
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-55
Index Index of the OMUa Board Index of the OMUb Board
Temperature required whenworking for a short time
-5°C - +55°C -5°C - +55°C
Relative humidity requiredwhen working for a long time
5%-85% 5%-85%
Relative humidity requiredwhen working for a shorttime
5%-95% 5%-95%
Performance CountersTable 6-47 describes the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-47 Performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board
Counter Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board
Number of recordedalarms
The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.
Time when the standbyOMU data issynchronized with theactive OMU data
The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the activeOMU board every second.
Duration of thesynchronization betweenthe active OMU files andstandby OMU files
Five minutes. The time needed for the synchronization variesaccording to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
Duration of theswitchover between theactive and standby OMUs
Duration from when the request for OMU switchover is acceptedto when the switchover is finished. This duration lasts for two tothree minutes.
Duration of the OMUrestart
Duration of the OMU restart due to OMU fault. This durationlasts for about three minutes.
6.14 PAMU BoardPAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the powerdistribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMUboard.
6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU BoardThe PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900cabinet.
6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU Board
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU BoardThe technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, and weight.
6.14.1 Functions of the PAMU BoardThe PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900cabinet.
The PAMU board performs the following functions:
l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarmsl Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarmsl Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa boardl Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports
6.14.2 Panel of the PAMU BoardOn the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the PAMU board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-57
Figure 6-16 Panel of the PAMU board
(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch
NOTE
The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.
l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it isfaulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm whenit is faulty.
6.14.3 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 6-48 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 6-48 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa boardproperly.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
OFF The power supply to the PAMU boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.
6.14.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 6-17 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
Figure 6-17 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board
With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table6-49.
Table 6-49 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-59
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-49.
6.14.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU BoardThe technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, and weight.
Table 6-50 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.
Table 6-50 Technical specifications of the PAMU board
Item Specification
Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode
Power consumption 15 W
Weight 0.2 kg
6.15 PEUa BoardPEUa refers to 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV:a. The PEUa board is optional.It can be installed either in the MPS or in the EPS. The number of PEUa boards to be installeddepends on site requirements. For the MPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23.For the EPS, the PEUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa BoardAs an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa BoardThe technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.15.1 Functions of the PEUa BoardAs an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.
The PEUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
linksl Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boardsl Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission
rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.l Supports the Abis and Gb interfaces
6.15.2 Panel of the PEUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the PEUa board.
Figure 6-18 Panel of the PEUa board
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-61
6.15.3 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-51 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 6-51 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
6.15.4 Ports on the PEUa BoardThere are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-52 describes the ports on the PEUa board.
Table 6-52 Ports on the PEUa board
Port Function ConnectorType
E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 0-7
DB44
E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 8-15
DB44
E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 16-23
DB44
E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1signals on channels 24-31
DB44
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Port Function ConnectorType
2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB maleconnector
6.15.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 6-19 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
Figure 6-19 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-63
NOTE
l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-19, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-19 is to turninwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, orS8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits ofS10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-53 describes the DIPswitches on the PEUa board.
Table 6-53 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIPSwitch
Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch
Meaning
S2 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S4 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S6 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
DIPSwitch
Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch
Meaning
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S8 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,consisting of two bits
(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
(OFF, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 balancedmode
(ON, OFF) Setting theworking mode toT1 mode
(OFF, OFF) Setting theworking mode toJ1 mode
NOTE
All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 areset to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.
6.15.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa BoardThe technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of thedimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relativehumidity.
Table 6-54 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.
Table 6-54 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-65
Item Specification
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 27.53 W
Weight 1.30 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Table 6-55 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.
Table 6-55 Specifications of the board processing capability
Item Specification
Abis TRX 384
Gb Maximum payloadthroughput (physical layer)
64 Mbit/s
6.16 PFCU BoardPFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU BoardThe technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speedadjustment.
6.16.1 Functions of the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
The PFCU board performs the following functions:
l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through theLED
l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box
l Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors
l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fanspeed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED
6.16.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-20 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-20 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 6-56. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIPswitch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 6-56 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significantbit)
OFF 1
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-67
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-21 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 6-21 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 6-57. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, theaddress of the PFCU board is 4.
Table 6-57 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 OFF 1
4 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
NOTE
The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
6.16.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU BoardThe technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speedadjustment.
Table 6-58 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.
Table 6-58 Technical specifications of the PFCU board
Item Specification
Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Item Specification
Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz
Detectable temperature range -5°Cto +55°C(basic requirement)
Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%to 100% of the full speed.
6.17 PFCB BoardPFCB refers to Fan Control Board. The PFCB board is installed in the front of the fan box. Eachfan box is configured with one PFCB board.
6.17.1 Functions of the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
6.17.2 Pins on the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of thesepins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
6.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU BoardThe technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, andrequirement for fan speed adjustment.
6.17.1 Functions of the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board is used to monitor the fan box.
The PFCB board performs the following functions:
l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through theLED
l Communicates with the SCUa board, to report the working status of the fan box, andresponds to the fan speed adjustment command
l Collects temperature information through temperature sensors and intelligently adjusts thefan speed based on the temperature information
l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fanspeed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED
6.17.2 Pins on the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of thesepins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)Figure 6-22 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-69
Figure 6-22 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 6-59.
Table 6-59 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
PinNumber
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Connected tojumper
No No No No Yes No No No
Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-23 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 6-23 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 6-60.
Table 6-60 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)
PinNumber
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Connected tojumper
No No No No No No Yes No
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
6.17.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU BoardThe technical specifications of the PFCB board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,frequency of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signals, detectable temperature range, andrequirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 6-61 describes the technical specifications of the PFCB board.
Table 6-61 Technical specifications of the PFCB board
Item Specification
Dimensions 390 mm × 50 mm
Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC
Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz
Detectable temperature range -5°Cto +55°C(basic requirement)
Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%to 100% of the full speed.
6.18 POUc BoardPOUc refers to 4-port IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c. ThePOUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. The number of POUcboards to be installed depends on site requirements. For the MPS, the POUc board can beinstalled in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.18.1 Functions of the POUc BoardAs an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3transmission.
6.18.2 Panel of the POUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
6.18.4 Ports on the POUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the POUc board.
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc BoardThe technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-71
6.18.1 Functions of the POUc BoardAs an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IPprotocol
l Supports the PPP functionl Extracts line clock signalsl Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boardsl Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces
NOTEThe POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when theports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.
l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management planefunctions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statistics reporting, as well astransmission port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control planefunctions, such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the managementplane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, traffic statisticsreporting, transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing ofchannels for data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SLprotocols.
6.18.2 Panel of the POUc BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-24 shows the panel of the POUc board.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 6-24 Panel of the POUc board
6.18.3 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 6-62 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 6-62 LEDs on the POUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loading state.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-73
LED Color Status Description
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.
6.18.4 Ports on the POUc BoardThere are four optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-63 describes the ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-63 Ports on the POUc board
Port Function Connector Type
RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive opticalsignals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,and RX refers to the receiving optical port.
LC/PC
TX
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc BoardThe technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications andspecifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specificationsconsist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,and relative humidity.
Table 6-64 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.
Table 6-64 Hardware specifications of the POUc board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Item Specification
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 77.25 W
Weight 1.50 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Table 6-65 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDMtransmission mode.
Table 6-65 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmissionmode
Item Specification
Abis TRX 512
A CIC(64K) 3,906
Ater CIC(16K) 7,168
Pb CIC(16K) 7,168
Gb Maximum payload throughput (physicallayer)
504 Mbit/s
Table 6-66 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IPtransmission mode.
Table 6-66 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmissionmode
Item Specification
Abis TRX 2,048
A CIC(64K) 23,040
Ater CIC(16K) 23,040 (The TC subrack supportsonly 13,000 CICs.)
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-75
Table 6-67 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLCtransmission mode.
Table 6-67 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in HDLC transmissionmode
Item Specification
Abis TRX 2,048
Table 6-68 describes the specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board.
Table 6-68 Specifications of the optical ports on the POUc board
Item Specification
Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-2 km-MM-SFP
Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-15 km-SM-ESFP
Optical Module 155M-1310 nm-40 km-SM-ESFP
Mode Multi-mode Single mode Single mode
Type LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC
Maximumopticaltransmissiondistance
2 km 15 km 40 km
Maximumoutput opticalpower
-14.0 dBm -8.0 dBm 0.0 dBm
Minimumoutput opticalpower
-19.0 dBm -15.0 dBm -5.0 dBm
Minimumreceiversensitivity
-30.0 dBm -31.0 dBm -37.0 dBm
Centerwavelength
1,310 nm 1,310 nm 1,310 nm
Transmissionrate
155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s 155.52 Mbit/s
6.19 SCUa BoardSCUa refers to GE Switching network and Control Unit REV:a. The SCUa board is mandatory.Two SCUa boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.19.1 Functions of the SCUa BoardThe SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for thesubrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented andthe internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
6.19.2 Panel of the SCUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
6.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
6.19.4 Ports on the SCUa BoardThere are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, andone TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa BoardThe technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
6.19.1 Functions of the SCUa BoardThe SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for thesubrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented andthe internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.
The SCUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides the maintenance management functionl Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinetl Supports the port trunking functionl Supports the active/standby switchoverl Enables inter-subrack connectionsl Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/sl Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900
6.19.2 Panel of the SCUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
Figure 6-25 shows the panel of the SCUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-77
Figure 6-25 Panel of the SCUa board
6.19.3 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-69 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 6-69 LEDs on the SCUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
6.19.4 Ports on the SCUa BoardThere are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one clock signal input port, andone TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-70 describes the ports on the SCUa board.
Table 6-70 Ports on the SCUa board
Port Function ConnectorType
10/100/1000BASE-T0to10/100/1000BASE-T9
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack connection.
RJ45
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-79
Port Function ConnectorType
10/100/1000BASE-T10 to10/100/1000BASE-T11
10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, the two ports are unusedin the BSC6900.
RJ45
COM Serial port for commissioning. RJ45
CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.
RJ45
TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used fortesting.
SMB maleconnector
6.19.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa BoardThe technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.
Table 6-71 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.
Table 6-71 Technical specifications of the SCUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 54.5 W
Weight 1.2 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s
6.20 TNUa BoardTNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. One or twoTNUa boards can be installed in slots 4 and 5 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa BoardThe TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CSservices of the entire system.
6.20.2 Panel of the TNUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
6.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
6.20.4 Ports on the TNUa BoardThere are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa BoardThe technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
6.20.1 Functions of the TNUa BoardThe TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CSservices of the entire system.
The TNUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switchingl Allocates the TDM network resources
6.20.2 Panel of the TNUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the TNUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-81
Figure 6-26 Panel of the TNUa board
6.20.3 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-72 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 6-72 LEDs on the TNUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply,but the board is faulty.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
OFF There is no powersupply, or the board isfaulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
6.20.4 Ports on the TNUa BoardThere are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-73 describes the ports on the TNUa board.
Table 6-73 Ports on the TNUa board
Port Function Connector Type
TDM0 to TDM5 TDM high-speed serial ports,used to connect the TNUaboards in different subracks
DB14
NOTE
The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports theinter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.
6.20.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa BoardThe technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-74 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.
Table 6-74 Technical specifications of the TNUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane of the subrack isresponsible for the power supply.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-83
Item Specification
Power consumption 31.20 W
Weight 1.00 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
6.21 XPUa BoardXPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to tenXPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installedin slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be installed inslots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.21.1 Functions of the XPUa BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUaboard and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.21.2 Panel of the XPUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
6.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
6.21.4 Ports on the XPUa BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
6.21.1 Functions of the XPUa BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUaboard and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Main Control XPUa BoardThe main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used tomanage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of thesystem. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resourcesbetween subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the loadinformation on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user planeresources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), whichis used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling
Non-Main Control XPUa BoardThe non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is usedto process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling
6.21.2 Panel of the XPUa BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the XPUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-85
Figure 6-27 Panel of the XPUa board
6.21.3 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-75 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 6-75 LEDs on the XPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.
6.21.4 Ports on the XPUa BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-76 describes the ports on the XPUa board.
Table 6-76 Ports on the XPUa board
Port Function Connector Type
10/100/1000BASE-T0 to10/100/1000BASE-T3
10M/100M/1000M Ethernetports
RJ45
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa BoardThe technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-77 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.
Table 6-77 Technical specifications of the XPUa board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-87
Item Specification
Power consumption 75.40 W
Weight 1.60 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Processing capability of the main controlXPUa board
Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and492,000 Busy Hour Call Attempts (BHCAs)
Processing capability of the non-maincontrol XPUa board
Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and656,000 BHCAs
NOTE
The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can becalculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.
6.22 XPUb BoardXPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to tenXPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards canbe installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the XPUb boards can beinstalled in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
NOTEIf the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed inslots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
6.22.1 Functions of the XPUb BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUbboard and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.
6.22.2 Panel of the XPUb BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
6.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
6.22.4 Ports on the XPUb BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
6.22.1 Functions of the XPUb BoardLoaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUbboard and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage theGSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the systemand process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is usedto process the GSM services on the control plane.
Main Control XPUb BoardThe main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used tomanage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of thesystem. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resourcesbetween subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the loadinformation on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user planeresources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), whichis used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling
Non-Main Control XPUb BoardThe non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is usedto process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfacesl Processing transport layer signalingl Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connectionsl Processing RFN signaling
6.22.2 Panel of the XPUb BoardThere are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-89
Figure 6-28 shows the panel of the XPUb board.
Figure 6-28 Panel of the XPUb board
6.22.3 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-78 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.
Table 6-78 LEDs on the XPUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Orange OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.
6.22.4 Ports on the XPUb BoardThere are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-79 describes the ports on the XPUb board.
Table 6-79 Ports on the XPUb board
Port Function Connector Type
10/100/1000BASE-T0 to10/100/1000BASE-T3
10M/100M/1000M Ethernetports
RJ45
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb BoardThe technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, powerconsumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.
Table 6-80 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.
Table 6-80 Technical specifications of the XPUb board
Item Specification
Dimensions 366.7 mm × 220 mm
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 6 Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-91
Item Specification
Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.The backplane of the subrack is responsible forthe power supply.
Power consumption 52.3 W
Weight 1.2 kg
Operating temperature (long-term) 0°Cto 45°C
Operating temperature (short-term) -5°Cto +55°C
Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%
Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%
Processing capability of the main controlXPUb board
Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and1,148,000 BHCAs
Processing capability of the non-maincontrol XPUb board
Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and1,312,000 BHCAs
NOTE
The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can becalculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.
6.23 WOPB BoardWOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common powerdistribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.
6.23.1 Functions of the WOPB BoardThe WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
6.23.1 Functions of the WOPB BoardThe WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
The WOPB board performs the following functions:
l Suppresses differential mode power surgel Suppresses common mode power surge
6 BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
6-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
7 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.
7.1 Power CablesThe power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internalpower cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND CablesThe PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable forthe power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fansubrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical CableThe optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board tothe Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxialcables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standbyEIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunksignals.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number ofactive/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1signals.
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohmtwisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects theactive/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. Thenumber of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-1
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/T1 signals.
7.8 Inter-TNUa CableThe inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that arelocated in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.
7.9 BITS Clock CableThe BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clockcables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signalsto the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clocksignal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversioncables.
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock CableThe Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shapedclock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHzclock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
7.11 Line Clock Signal CableThe line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed totransmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to theGCUa board.
7.12 Straight-Through CableThe straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshieldedstraight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boardsin different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan SubrackThe monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to theservice subracks.
7.14 Alarm Box Signal CableThe alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. Youcan choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send thealarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution BoxThe monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals fromthe power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission CableThe GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals tothe GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.17 OMU serial port cableThe OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication CableThe EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 andthe EMU.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
7.1 Power CablesThe power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internalpower cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distributionbox at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internalpower cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internalpower cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.
Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box
Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables whenthe BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box.
Table 7-1 External power cables
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
External -48 Vpowercable
Blue 25/35 2-hole JGterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF
Four per cabinet
External RTNpowercable
Black 25/35 2-hole JGterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF
Four per cabinet
Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
Internal-48 VDCpowercable
Blue 10 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack
Two per subrack
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-3
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
InternalRTNpowercable
Black 10 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack
Two per subrack
Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
Internal-48 VDCpowercable
Blue 2 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
D-typeconnector/Power inputport on theindependentfan subrack
Two per independentfan subrack
InternalRTNpowercable
Black 2 OTterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
D-typeconnector/Power inputport on theindependentfan subrack
Two per independentfan subrack
Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable.
Figure 7-1 External power cable
(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal
Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks
Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack
Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution BoxTable 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with thecommon power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when theBSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box.
Table 7-4 External power cables
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
External -48 Vpowercable
Blue 25/35 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF
Four per cabinet
External RTNpowercable
Black 25/35 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input port onthe powerdistribution box
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the PDF
Four per cabinet
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-5
Table 7-5 Internal power cables
Name Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
ConnectorType 1/InstallationPosition 1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
Internal-48 VDCpowercable
Blue 8 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack
Two per subrack
InternalRTNpowercable
Black 8 Cord endterminal/-48 VDC input porton the powerdistributionbox
OTterminal/-48 VDC output porton the subrack
Two per subrack
The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when theBSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/internal power cable.
Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable
X1: Cord end terminal X2: OT terminal
7.2 PGND CablesThe PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable forthe power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fansubrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets arecombined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacentcabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 7-6 PGND cables
CableName
Color Cross-SectionalArea
mm2
Connector Type1/InstallationPosition1
ConnectorType 2/InstallationPosition 2
Quantity
ExternalPGNDcable
Green andyellow
25/35 OTterminal/Grounding bolt atthe toprear ofeachcabinet
OT terminal/PGND outputport on the PDF
One percabinet
Inter-cabinetPGNDcable
Green andyellow
6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet
OT terminal/PGND busbar ofeach cabinet
Threebetweenevery twoadjacentcabinets
PGNDcable forthe powerdistribution box
Green andyellow
6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet
OT terminal/Portfor PGND cableon the powerdistribution box
One perpowerdistributionbox
PGNDcable forthe subrack
Green andyellow
6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet
OT terminal/Portfor the PGNDcable on thesubrack
Two persubrack
PGNDcable forthe cabinetdoor
Green andyellow
6 OTterminal/Grounding bolt onthe base
OT terminal/Grounding bolton the cabinetdoor
Eight percabinet
PGNDcable fortheindependent fansubrack
Green andyellow
6 OTterminal/PGNDbusbar ofeachcabinet
OT terminal/Grounding pointof theindependent fansubrack
One perindependentfan subrack
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-7
The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables forthe BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6shows the other PGND cables.
Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack
Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables
7.3 Optical CableThe optical cable is optional in the BSC6900. It is used to connect the optical interface board tothe Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) or other NEs. The number of optical cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.
Classification of the Optical CableAccording to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can beclassified into the following types:l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cablel LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cablel LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE
l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the opticalinterface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on siterequirements.
l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to theODF or other NEs or connects the optical interface boards.
l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached withtemporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connectedto the RX port.
CAUTIONThe TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the opticalsignals cannot be received or transmitted.
BSC6900 Optical CablesTable 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables
Optical Cable Type Appearance
LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode
LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode
LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode
InstallationThe optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface boardin the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PCconnector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of theoptical cable.
Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable
7.4 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxialcables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standbyEIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunksignals.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-9
The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxialcable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Appearance
Figure 7-8 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-8 75-ohm coaxial cable
(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of thecable)
(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector
The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connectorto the other end according to the actual requirements.
Pin Assignment
The outer shielding layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metalcase of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectorsfor the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables
Pin ofDB44Connector
W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connector
W2 Remarks
Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier
Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier
38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1
23 Tip 30 Tip
37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2
22 Tip 29 Tip
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Pin ofDB44Connector
W1 Remarks Pin ofDB44Connector
W2 Remarks
Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier
Signal MicroCoaxial CableIdentifier
36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3
21 Tip 28 Tip
35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4
20 Tip 27 Tip
34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5
19 Tip 26 Tip
33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6
18 Tip 25 Tip
32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7
17 Tip 24 Tip
31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8
16 Tip 7 Tip
Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8.
Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal Bearer
Ring Shielding layer of micro coaxial cables
Tip Core of micro coaxial cables
InstallationOne end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUaboard. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.
7.5 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial CableThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number ofactive/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1signals.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-11
AppearanceThe active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohmcoaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. Allof the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-9 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Figure 7-9 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable
(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector
(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of thecable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You needto add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.
Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4
X1 W3 Remarks
X1 W4 Remarks
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier
38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1
23 Tip 30 Tip
37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2
22 Tip 29 Tip
36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3
21 Tip 28 Tip
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
X1 W3 Remarks
X1 W4 Remarks
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal MicroCoaxialCableIdentifier
35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4
20 Tip 27 Tip
34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5
19 Tip 26 Tip
33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6
18 Tip 25 Tip
32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7
17 Tip 24 Tip
31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8
16 Tip 7 Tip
NOTE
In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.
Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10.
Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal Bearer
Ring Shielding layer of coaxial cables
Tip Core of coaxial cables
Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2
W2 W1
Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
Remarks Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
Remarks
38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR
23 23 30 30
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-13
W2 W1
Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
Remarks Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
Remarks
37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR
22 22 29 29
36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR
21 21 28 28
35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR
20 20 27 27
34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR
19 19 26 26
33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR
18 18 25 25
32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR
17 17 24 24
31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR
16 16 7 7
NOTE
In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layerof the twisted pair cable.
InstallationThe two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connectedto the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxialcable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE throughtransmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also beconnected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-10 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-10 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables
7.6 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohmtwisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects theactive/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
Appearance
Figure 7-11 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Figure 7-11 120-ohm twisted pair cable
(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer ofthe cable)
(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector
The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add aconnector to the other end according to the actual requirements.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-15
Pin AssignmentThe outer shielding layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by themetal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin ofDB44Connector
W1 Color Pin ofDB44Connector
W2 Color
Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier
Signal 120-OhmTwistedPairCableIdentifier
38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue
23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White
37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange
22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White
36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green
21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White
35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown
20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White
34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey
19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White
33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue
18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red
32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange
17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red
31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green
16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red
Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal Bearer
Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1signals
Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1signals
Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals
Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
InstallationOne end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.
7.7 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair CableThe active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. Thenumber of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cableconnects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/T1 signals.
AppearanceFigure 7-12 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Figure 7-12 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable
(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector
(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturerof the cable)
(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-17
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. Youneed to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.
Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4
X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier
Pin ofDB44Connector
Signal Twisted PairCableIdentifier
38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue
23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White
37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange
22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White
36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green
21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White
35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown
20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White
34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey
19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White
33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue
18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red
32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange
17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red
31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green
16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red
NOTE
In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.
Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal Bearer
Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signalsto the BSC6900
Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals to the BSC6900
Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signalsfrom the BSC6900
Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1signals from the BSC6900
Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2
Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks
Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
Pin of X1Connector
Pin of X2Connector
38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR
23 23 30 30
37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR
22 22 29 29
36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR
21 21 28 28
35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR
20 20 27 27
34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR
19 19 26 26
33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR
18 18 25 25
32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR
17 17 24 24
31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR
16 16 7 7
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-19
NOTE
In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shielding layerof the twisted pair cable.
InstallationThe two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable areconnected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to anotherNE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted paircable can also be connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-13 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.
Figure 7-13 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables
7.8 Inter-TNUa CableThe inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that arelocated in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installeddepends on the site requirements.
AppearanceFigure 7-14 shows the inter-TNUa cable.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-14 Inter-TNUa cable
(1) DB14 (2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, andmanufacturer of the cable)
InstallationThe two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active andstandby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.
Figure 7-15 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-21
Figure 7-15 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables
7.9 BITS Clock CableThe BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clockcables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signalsto the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clocksignal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversioncables.
AppearanceFigure 7-16 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-16 75-ohm coaxial clock cable
(1) SMB connector (2) Label
Figure 7-17 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
Figure 7-17 120-ohm clock conversion cable
(1) SMB connector 2Label
NOTE
The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector isused, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to theconnection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.
InstallationOne end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-18 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-23
Figure 7-18 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables
7.10 Y-Shaped Clock CableThe Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shapedclock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHzclock signals from the GCUa board in the MPS to the SCUa board in the EPS.
NOTE
The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.
AppearanceFigure 7-19 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-19 Y-shaped clock cable
(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector
InstallationThe RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa board inthe EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the active andstandby GCUa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-20 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.
Figure 7-20 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-25
7.11 Line Clock Signal CableThe line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed totransmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to theGCUa board.
NOTE
When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sentto the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is notrequired.
AppearanceFigure 7-21 shows the line clock signal cable.
Figure 7-21 Line clock signal cable
(1) SMB connector
InstallationOne end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interfaceboard. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on theGCUa board.
7.12 Straight-Through CableThe straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshieldedstraight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boardsin different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
AppearanceFigure 7-22 shows the shielded straight-through cable.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 7-22 Shielded straight-through cable
NOTE
X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.
Figure 7-23 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.
Figure 7-23 Unshielded straight-through cable
NOTE
X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.
Pin AssignmentTable 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-27
Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable
X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color
X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange
X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange
X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green
X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue
X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue
X1-6 Green X2-6 Green
X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown
X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown
Installationl When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boardsthat are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-24.
Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between theSCUa boards in different subracks
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa board to other
devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1 on theOMUa board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to theEthernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c board to otherdevices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
FG2a/FG2c board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to theEthernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to theCBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on theXPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected toan Ethernet port on the CBC.
7.13 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent FanSubrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to theservice subracks.
AppearanceFigure 7-25 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-25 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one endand a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.
Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
Start End Description Remarks
X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.6 Tx-
X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.2 Rx-
X1.5 X2.5 GND -
X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL isconnected toX2.SHELL throughthe shielding layer.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-29
Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19.
Table 7-20 Signals
Signal Signal Description
Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted
Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted
Rx+ Positive phase signal received
Rx- Negative phase signal received
Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrackis connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector atthe other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.
NOTE
When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom totop. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to thebottom subrack in the cabinet.
7.14 Alarm Box Signal CableThe alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. Youcan choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send thealarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual typemust be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signalcable with the DB9 connector as an example.
Figure 7-26 shows an alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-26 Alarm box signal cable
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.
Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable
RJ45 DB9
3 5
5 2
6 3
Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial porton the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to theserial port on the LMT.
Figure 7-27 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.
Figure 7-27 Connection of the alarm box signal cable
7.15 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power DistributionBox
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals fromthe power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
Appearance
Figure 7-28 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-31
Figure 7-28 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end anda DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
Start End Description Remarks
X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Tx-
X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.6 Rx-
X1.5 X2.5 RTN -
X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL isconnected toX2.SHELL throughthe shielding layer.
Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22.
Table 7-23 Signals
Signal Signal Description
Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted
Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted
Rx+ Positive phase signal received
Rx- Negative phase signal received
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
InstallationThe DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box isconnected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at theother end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-29 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the powerdistribution box.
Figure 7-29 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
7.16 GPS Signal Transmission CableThe GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals tothe GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
AppearanceFigure 7-30 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.
Figure 7-30 GPS signal transmission cable
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-33
X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector
InstallationConnect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector ofa 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmissioncable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connectedto port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end ofthe cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.
7.17 OMU serial port cableThe OMU serial port cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
AppearanceFigure 7-31 shows the OMU serial port cable.
Figure 7-31 OMU serial port cable
Pin AssignmentBoth ends of the OMU serial port cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists thepins of the OMU serial port cable.
Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial port cable
DB9 DB9
2 3
3 2
5 5
Installation PositionOne end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. Theother end of the OMU serial port cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenanceterminal.
7 CablesBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
7-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTEThe OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.
7.18 EMU RS485 Communication CableThe EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 andthe EMU.
Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the RS485 communication cable.
Figure 7-32 RS485 communication cable
Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.
Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable
RJ45 DB9
4 2
1 3
5 6
2 7
Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other endof the cable is connected to J1 port on the power distribution box.
NOTE
One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signalcable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable isrecommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is notsufficient.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 7 Cables
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
7-35
8 LEDs on the Boards
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).
8.11 LEDs on the MDMC Board
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-1
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
8.12 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.16 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.17 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
8.18 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.19 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
8.20 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
8.1 LEDs on the DPUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.
Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board in active mode.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.
Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-3
LED Color Status Description
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.
Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf BoardThere are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.
Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.
8.5 LEDs on the EIUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.
Table 8-5 LEDs on the EIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or the boardis faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-5
8.6 LEDs on the FG2a BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2aboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.
Table 8-6 LEDs on the FG2a board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2c BoardAmong all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2cboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2c board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Orange OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
8.8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa BoardThere are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 8-8 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-7
LED Color Status Description
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
8.9 LEDs on the GOUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.
Table 8-9 LEDs on the GOUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
8.10 LEDs on the GOUc BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 8-10 LEDs on the GOUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (opticalport LED)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (opticalport LED)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
8.11 LEDs on the MDMC BoardThere are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.
Table 8-11 LEDs on the MDMC board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The MDMC board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The MDMC board is not working or itdoes not communicate with the SCUaboard properly.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-9
LED Color Status Description
OFF The power supply to the MDMC boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the MDMCboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.
8.12 LEDs on the OIUa BoardThere are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.
Table 8-12 LEDs on the OIUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but theboard is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.
8.13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb BoardThere are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, andHD.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 8-13 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is being started.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode, or theboard is disconnected.
OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.
OFF The board cannot be removed.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is being switched over tothe other working mode.
HD Green OFF There is no read or write operationon the hard disk.
Blinking The hard disk is being read orwritten.
8.14 LEDs on the PAMU BoardThere are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.
Table 8-14 LEDs on the PAMU board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The PAMU board is functional andcommunicates with the SCUa boardproperly.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-11
LED Color Status Description
ON for 0.25s and OFFfor 0.25s
The PAMU board is faulty or it does notcommunicate with the SCUa boardproperly.
OFF The power supply to the PAMU boardis abnormal or the power distributionbox does not work properly.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON The power distribution box is faulty.During the self-check of the PAMUboard, however, the ALM LED is alsoON. This indicates that the ALM LEDis functional.
8.15 LEDs on the PEUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.
Table 8-15 LEDs on the PEUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
8.16 LEDs on the POUc BoardThere are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.
Table 8-16 LEDs on the POUc board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receivesignals properly.
OFF The STM-1 port receives signalsproperly.
8.17 LEDs on the SCUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.
Table 8-17 LEDs on the SCUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFF for0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply, butthe board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-13
LED Color Status Description
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no datatransmission over theEthernet port.
Blinking There is data transmissionover the Ethernet port.
8.18 LEDs on the TNUa BoardThere are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.
Table 8-18 LEDs on the TNUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loadingstate.
ON There is power supply,but the board is faulty.
OFF There is no powersupply, or the board isfaulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is in standbymode.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
8.19 LEDs on the XPUa BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUaboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.
Table 8-19 LEDs on the XPUa board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Green OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.
8.20 LEDs on the XPUb BoardAmong all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUbboard, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernetport: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
8-15
Table 8-20 LEDs on the XPUb board
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The board is in loading state.
ON There is power supply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.
ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.
OFF The board is in standby mode.
LINK (at theEthernet port)
Green ON The link is well connected.
OFF The link is disconnected.
ACT (at theEthernet port)
Orange OFF There is no data transmission overthe Ethernet port.
Blinking There is data transmission over theEthernet port.
8 LEDs on the BoardsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
8-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
9 DIP Switches on Components
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.
9.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of thesepins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-1
9.1 DIP Switch on the SubrackThe DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
Location of the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of theDIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.
AppearanceFigure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.
Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack
Description about the DIP SwitchThe DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. Thehigher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Table 9-1 Description about the bits
Bit Description
1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is theleast significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bitis set to OFF, it indicates 1.
6 Odd parity check bit
7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON
8 (the most significantbit)
Reserved
Principle of the DIP Switch SettingAs the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an oddnumber. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.2. Set bit 7 to ON.3. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch. Note that the setting of bit 8
remains unchanged.l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.
Assume that the subracks are numbered from 0 to 2 and that bit 8 is set to OFF. Table 9-2describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.
Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch
SubrackNo.
Bit Setting of the DIPSwitch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa BoardThe EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-3
Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate
NOTE
l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In thiscase, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced toand combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.
Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.
Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable
Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable
S1 8 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 0-7
ON OFF
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75-ohm CoaxialCable
Setting for120-ohmTwisted PairCable
7 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s 8-15
ON OFF
6 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s16-23
ON OFF
5 Impedanceselection switchof E1s/T1s24-31
ON OFF
1-4 Reserved
S3 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 0-7
ON OFF
S4 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 8-15
ON OFF
S5 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 16-23
ON OFF
S6 1-8 TX groundswitch of E1s/T1s 24-31
ON OFF
Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.
Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches
DIP Switch Description
E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of theboard and to notify the software of the currenttransmission mode
E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting endof the E1/T1 signals
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-5
NOTE
l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switcheson the standby board.
l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC BoardThe MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.
Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board
With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.
To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5.
Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU BoardThe PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board
With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table9-6.
Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board
Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description
0 1 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
NOTE
In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa BoardThe PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-7
Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board
(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
NOTE
l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottomplate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are twosquare holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Throughthe two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-board, and thus you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turninwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, orS8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits ofS10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency betweenthe physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting bycommand as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SETE1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support forbalanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you mustalso manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalancedmode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxialcable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signalsare transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted paircable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.
DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the groundingof 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIPswitches on the PEUa board.
Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board
DIPSwitch
Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch
Meaning
S2 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S4 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S6 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-9
DIPSwitch
Bit Description Setting of DIPSwitch
Meaning
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S8 1-8 TX ground switch ofE1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15
ON Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
OFF Setting theworking mode toother modes
S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting theworking mode,consisting of two bits
(ON, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 unbalancedmode
(OFF, ON) Setting theworking mode toE1 balancedmode
(ON, OFF) Setting theworking mode toT1 mode
(OFF, OFF) Setting theworking mode toJ1 mode
NOTE
All the DIP switches are set to E1 balanced mode by default, that is, all the bits of S2, S4, S6, and S8 areset to OFF. For S10, the first bit is set to OFF, and the second bit to ON.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU BoardThe PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIPswitch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in afan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU boardis configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIPswitch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.
Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significantbit)
OFF 1
2 ON 0
3 ON 0
4 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.
Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board
To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described inTable 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, theaddress of the PFCU board is 4.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-11
Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIPSwitch
Description
SW1 1 (the least significantbit)
ON 0
2 ON 0
3 OFF 1
4 (the most significantbit)
ON 0
NOTE
The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
9.7 Pins on the PFCB BoardThe PFCB board provides eight pairs of pins for jumpers. After being connected to jumpers,these pins are used to set the address and working mode of the PFCB board. The settings of thesepins depend on the installation position of the PFCB board.
Pins on the PFCB Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)Figure 9-8 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 9-8 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Pins on the PFCB board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
PinNumber
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Connected tojumper
No No No No Yes No No No
9 DIP Switches on ComponentsBSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description
9-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 03 (2010-09-20)
Pins on the PFCB Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)Figure 9-9 shows the pins on the PFCB board.
Figure 9-9 Pins on the PFCB board
To set the address of the PFCB board, first remove the fan box and then set the pins as describedin Table 9-11.
Table 9-11 Pins on the PFCB board (in the independent fan subrack)
PinNumber
1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16
Connected tojumper
No No No No No No Yes No
NOTE
The pins on the PFCB board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.
BSC6900 GSMHardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components
Issue 03 (2010-09-20) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
9-13